Ricoh MP 4000 5000 Service Manual

Model AL-C1/C1.
5
Machine Code:
D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092
Field Service Manual
10 November, 2009
Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier
power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage
even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main
switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period (the Start key starts blinking
red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical components
as the copier starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating.
Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
• To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause
temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical
attention.
2. This machine, which uses a high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density
is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

1. This machine and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has
completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing
the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
1
Handling Toner
• Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.
• If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated
location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
• If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are signs
of any problem, seek medical attention.
• If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
• Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges, and
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the reach of children.
• Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic photoconductor
in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
2
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit
section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
3
Symbols and Abbreviations
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are
as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Cautions, Notes, etc.
The following headings provide special information:
• FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
• Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
4
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety Notices.....................................................................................................................................................1
Important Safety Notices...............................................................................................................................1
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal...................................................................................................2
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................2
Symbols and Abbreviations...............................................................................................................................4
Symbols and Abbreviations...........................................................................................................................4
Cautions, Notes, etc.......................................................................................................................................4
1. Product Information
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................15
Machine Configuration....................................................................................................................................16
Copier...........................................................................................................................................................16
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................19
Overview..........................................................................................................................................................20
Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................20
Paper Path....................................................................................................................................................22
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................23
2. Installation
Installation Requirements.................................................................................................................................25
Environment..................................................................................................................................................26
Machine Level..............................................................................................................................................27
Minimum Space Requirements...................................................................................................................27
Power Requirements....................................................................................................................................28
Installation Flow Chart.....................................................................................................................................29
Main Machine Installation...............................................................................................................................30
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................30
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................32
Moving the Machine...................................................................................................................................42
Transporting the Machine...........................................................................................................................42
Paper Feed Unit Installation (D351)...............................................................................................................43
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................43
LCT 2000-Sheet...............................................................................................................................................47
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................47
6
1200-Sheet LCT (D353).................................................................................................................................51
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................51
Installation procedure..................................................................................................................................51
Auto Reverse Document Feeder (B802)........................................................................................................54
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................54
Platen Cover Installation (G329)....................................................................................................................59
1-Bin Tray Unit (D389)....................................................................................................................................60
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................60
Bridge Unit (D386)..........................................................................................................................................63
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................63
2000/3000-Sheet Finishers (B804/B805).................................................................................................67
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................67
Punch Unit.........................................................................................................................................................74
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................74
1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)...........................................................................................................................80
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................80
Key Counter Bracket........................................................................................................................................85
Key Counter Interface Unit..............................................................................................................................88
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner).............................................................................................................91
Tray Heater.......................................................................................................................................................94
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)........................................................................................................96
Component Check.......................................................................................................................................96
7
HDD Option (D362, only for D009/D012)..............................................................................................105
Component Check....................................................................................................................................105
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................106
Copy Data Security Unit...............................................................................................................................108
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................108
Controller Options.........................................................................................................................................111
Controller Board Slots...............................................................................................................................111
IEEE1284...................................................................................................................................................112
IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN)........................................................................................................113
Bluetooth....................................................................................................................................................117
Gigabit Ethernet.........................................................................................................................................118
File Format Converter................................................................................................................................118
PostScript 3................................................................................................................................................119
IPDS Unit....................................................................................................................................................121
HDD Encryption Unit.................................................................................................................................123
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type I (D362)............................................................................................128
Browser Unit Type D.................................................................................................................................132
VM Card Type F (D377)..........................................................................................................................136
Printer and P/S Options (only for D009/D012)...................................................................................137
Check All Connections..............................................................................................................................148
3. Preventive maintenance
PM Tables.......................................................................................................................................................149
4. Replacement and Adjustment
General Cautions..........................................................................................................................................151
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................151
Used Toner.................................................................................................................................................151
Special Tools and Lubricants........................................................................................................................152
Special Tools..............................................................................................................................................152
Lubricants...................................................................................................................................................152
Exterior Covers...............................................................................................................................................153
Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover.............................................................................................153
Left Cover...................................................................................................................................................154
8
Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................154
Right Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................155
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................156
Paper Exit Cover........................................................................................................................................157
Inner Tray...................................................................................................................................................157
Scanner -1......................................................................................................................................................159
Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................................................159
Original Length/Width Sensors...............................................................................................................159
Exposure Lamp..........................................................................................................................................161
Scanner Motor...........................................................................................................................................163
Sensor Board Unit (SBU)..........................................................................................................................165
Lamp Stabilizer .........................................................................................................................................166
SIO (Scanner In/Out) Board...................................................................................................................167
Scanner HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................168
Platen Cover Sensor..................................................................................................................................168
Scanner-2.......................................................................................................................................................170
Front Scanner Wire...................................................................................................................................170
Rear Scanner Wire....................................................................................................................................173
Touch Panel Position Adjustment..............................................................................................................175
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................................177
Caution Decal Locations...........................................................................................................................177
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................178
Polygon Mirror Motor...............................................................................................................................179
Laser Synchronization Detector................................................................................................................179
LD Unit........................................................................................................................................................180
PCDU..............................................................................................................................................................183
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit).....................................................................................183
Drum...........................................................................................................................................................183
Pick-off Pawls.............................................................................................................................................187
Charge Roller and Cleaning Roller..........................................................................................................187
Drum Cleaning Blade 1............................................................................................................................188
ID Sensor....................................................................................................................................................189
Development..................................................................................................................................................191
9
Development Filter.....................................................................................................................................191
Development Roller...................................................................................................................................191
Developer..................................................................................................................................................194
TD Sensor...................................................................................................................................................196
Transfer...........................................................................................................................................................198
Transfer Belt Unit........................................................................................................................................198
Transfer Belt...............................................................................................................................................198
Toner Overflow Sensor.............................................................................................................................201
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade ...................................................................................................................201
Paper Feed.....................................................................................................................................................202
Paper Feed Unit.........................................................................................................................................202
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers.....................................................................................................202
Tray Lift Motor............................................................................................................................................203
Relay, Tray Lift, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensors.............................................................................204
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................204
Fusing..............................................................................................................................................................207
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................207
Web Roller Unit.........................................................................................................................................207
Brake Pad...................................................................................................................................................208
Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers......................................................................................................209
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller................................................................................................................212
Thermostat..................................................................................................................................................213
Thermistor...................................................................................................................................................214
Hot Roller Strippers...................................................................................................................................215
Fusing Lamps..............................................................................................................................................216
Hot Roller and Pressure Roller..................................................................................................................218
Paper Exit........................................................................................................................................................220
Paper Exit Unit...........................................................................................................................................220
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, and Paper Exit Sensors............................................................................220
Junction Jam Sensor..................................................................................................................................221
Paper Exit Motor........................................................................................................................................222
Duplex............................................................................................................................................................223
Duplex Unit................................................................................................................................................223
10
Right Door Cover.......................................................................................................................................225
Duplex Door Sensor..................................................................................................................................226
Duplex Entrance Sensor............................................................................................................................226
Duplex Exit Sensor....................................................................................................................................227
Duplex/By-pass Motor.............................................................................................................................229
Duplex Inverter Motor...............................................................................................................................230
By-pass...........................................................................................................................................................232
By-pass Paper Size Sensor.......................................................................................................................232
By-pass Paper End Sensor........................................................................................................................233
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter...............................................................234
By-pass Feed Clutch..................................................................................................................................234
Drive Area......................................................................................................................................................236
Paper Feed Clutch.....................................................................................................................................236
Development Paddle Motor.....................................................................................................................236
Transfer/Development Motor..................................................................................................................237
Drum Motor...............................................................................................................................................238
Fusing Motor..............................................................................................................................................238
Web Motor................................................................................................................................................239
Paper Feed Motor.....................................................................................................................................240
Transfer Belt Contact Motor.....................................................................................................................240
Registration Motor.....................................................................................................................................241
Toner Supply Motor..................................................................................................................................241
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................243
Controller Unit...........................................................................................................................................243
HDD Unit (Standard for D011/D013/D091/D092).........................................................................243
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................245
Mother Board............................................................................................................................................247
BICU...........................................................................................................................................................248
IOB.............................................................................................................................................................248
PSU.............................................................................................................................................................249
High Voltage Power Supply Board..........................................................................................................250
Fusing Exhaust Fan....................................................................................................................................251
Controller Fan............................................................................................................................................251
11
Copy Adjustments..........................................................................................................................................253
Overview....................................................................................................................................................253
Printing........................................................................................................................................................253
Scanning....................................................................................................................................................257
ADF Image Adjustment.............................................................................................................................259
Touch Screen Calibration.........................................................................................................................260
5. Service Tables
Service Program Mode.................................................................................................................................263
Service Program Mode Operation..........................................................................................................263
Service Program Mode Tables.................................................................................................................264
Service Program Mode Tables.....................................................................................................................265
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................265
Using SP Modes.............................................................................................................................................266
Test Pattern Printing....................................................................................................................................266
SMC Print Out Lists: SP5-990..................................................................................................................267
Nip Band Width Adjustment: SP1-109...................................................................................................268
Memory Clear: SP5-801..........................................................................................................................269
Software Reset...........................................................................................................................................271
System Settings and Copy Setting Reset..................................................................................................271
Copier Setting Reset..................................................................................................................................272
Updating the Firmware..................................................................................................................................273
Before You Begin.......................................................................................................................................273
Updating Firmware...................................................................................................................................273
Handling Firmware Update Errors...........................................................................................................276
NVRAM Data Upload/Download..............................................................................................................278
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)......................................................................................................278
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825).................................................................................................278
SD Card Appli Move....................................................................................................................................279
Overview....................................................................................................................................................279
Move Exec.................................................................................................................................................279
Undo Exec..................................................................................................................................................280
Self-Diagnostic Mode...................................................................................................................................281
Self-Diagnostic Mode at Power On........................................................................................................281
12
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow..........................................................................................................................282
Detailed Self-Diagnostic Mode................................................................................................................283
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis...........................................................................................................283
Using the Debug Log.....................................................................................................................................284
Overview....................................................................................................................................................284
Switching On And Setting Up Save Debug Log.....................................................................................284
Dip Switches...................................................................................................................................................289
I/O Board: DIP SW101...........................................................................................................................289
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Conditions.................................................................................................................................291
Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................292
Sensors.......................................................................................................................................................292
Switches.....................................................................................................................................................295
Blown Fuse Conditions..................................................................................................................................297
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save...................................................................................................................................................299
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................299
Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................300
Paper Save.....................................................................................................................................................303
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function............................................................................................303
13
14
Specifications 1
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Optional Equipment
15
Machine Configuration
1 Copier
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
16
Machine Configuration
Item Callout Key Machine Code
D009/D011 D009/D011
D012/D013
D091/D092
[1] - D012/D013
D091/D092
1
ARDF (See Note 1) [3] C B802
Platen Cover (See Note 1) [2] C G329
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [6] C D351
2000-sheet LCT [5] C D352
1200-sheet LCT [4] C D353
1-Bin Tray [10] U D389
Bridge Unit [9] U D386
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2.) [7] C B408
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (See

Copier [8] C B804/B805
Note 2)
B702-17 (2/3-hole)
-Punch Unit (See Note 3.) - C
US
B702-27 (2/4-hole)
Metric
B702-28 (4-hole)
Scandinavia
Key Counter Bracket - C A674
HDD (for D009/D012 only) - U D362
DataOverwriteSecurity - U D362
Copy Data Security Unit - C B829
HDD Encryption Unit - C D377
Scanner Accessibility Option - C B838
17
Item Callout Key Machine Code
Fax Option
D346
1 for D009/D011/D012/D013 - U
Fax Option for D091/D092 D509

Fax
G3 Interface Unit - U D346
SAF Memory - C G578
Handset (USA model only) - C B433
Printer/Scanner Unit - U D381
Printer Unit - U D381
RPCS Printer Unit - U D381
Printer Upgrade Unit - U D381
Scanner Upgrade Unit - U D381
PostScript3 Unit - U D381

Printer/
IPDS Unit - U D381
Scanner
Gigabit Ethernet - C G874
IEEE 1284 - C B679
IEEE 802.11a/g, g Wireless LAN - C D377
Bluetooth - C B826
Memory Unit 256 MB - U D362
File Format Converter - C D377
NOTE:
1. The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together.
2. The finisher requires the bridge unit and two-tray paper feed unit or 2000-sheet LCT. The 1000-sheet
finisher and 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher cannot be installed together.
3. The punch unit requires the 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher.
18
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
The D091/D092 series are successor models to the D009/D011/D012/D013 series. If you have
1
experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this
manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products

D091/D092 D009/D011/D012/D013
Scanner Color only Color and B/W
VM Card Standard Option
19
Overview
1 Component Layout
1 Exposure Glass 22 By-pass Feed Roller
2 2nd Mirror 23 By-pass Separation Roller
3 1st Mirror 24 Duplex/by-pass transport roller
4 Exposure Lamp 25 Upper Relay Roller
20
Overview
5 Original Width Sensors 26 Feed Roller
6 Original Length Sensors 27 Separation Roller
7 Scanner Motor 28 Pick-up Roller 1

8 Lens 29 Bottom Plate
9 SBU 30 Development Unit
10 Junction Gate 2 31 Charge Roller
11 Duplex Inverter Gate 32 Fθ Mirror
12 Duplex Entrance Sensor 33 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
13 Duplex Inverter Roller 34 Polygonal Mirror Motor
14 Hot Roller 35 Laser Unit
15 Pressure Roller 36 Toner Bottle Holder
16 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Junction Gate 1
17 Duplex Transport Roller 38 Exit Roller
18 Transfer Belt 39 Paper Exit Sensor
19 OPC Drum 40 3rd Mirror
20 Registration Roller 41 Scanner HP Sensor
21 By-pass Pick-up Roller
21
Paper Path
1 ARDF
2 Interchange Unit
3 Duplex Unit
4 By-pass Tray
5 Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet)
6 Paper Tray Unit
7 Two-Tray Finisher
8 Bridge Unit
9 1-Bin Tray
22
Overview
Drive Layout
1 Scanner Motor 10 Paper Feed Clutch 1
2 Fusing Motor 11 Feed Motor
3 Web Motor 12 By-pass Paper Feed Clutch
4 Transfer/Development Motor 13 Registration Motor
5 Drum Motor 14 Duplex/By-pass Motor
6 Development Paddle Motor 15 Transfer Belt Contact Motor
7 Tray Lift Motor 1 16 Duplex Inverter Motor
23
8 Tray Lift Motor 2 17 Paper Exit Motor
9 Paper Feed Clutch 2
24
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
• Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the 2
hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power
LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
• Install the machine in a safe place for keeping security.

• Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at a customer's hand.
• The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine
is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard
disk or memory for reading or writing data.
25
2. Installation
• Rating voltage for peripherals: Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
Environment
26
Installation Requirements
Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F)
Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
Ventilation: Room air should turn at least 30 m3/hr/person
Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3) 2

1. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
2. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
4. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more than
5 mm (0.2").
5. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Minimum Space Requirements
Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
27
2. Installation
A: Front: >75 cm (29.6")

B: Left: > 10 cm (4")
C: Rear: > 10 cm (4")
D: Right > 55 cm (21.7")
• The 75 cm (29.6") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only. If the
operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is required.
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure the plug is
firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:

North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12.5 A
Europe/Asia 220 V to 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: more than 6.8 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% to 15%
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
28
Installation Flow Chart
Installation Flow Chart

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers.

Paper Tray Unit or LCT 2000-sheet: Needed for the LCT 1200-sheet and finishers.
29
2. Installation
Main Machine Installation

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
2
D009/D011/
Description D091/D092
D012/D013
1 Operation Instruction (-17, -19, -21, -29) 1 -
Operation Instruction - Quick Reference

2 1 -
(-17, -19, -21, -29)
Operation Instruction - Troubleshooting

3 1 1
(-17, -19, -29)
Operation Instruction - About This Machine

4 1 1
(-17, -19, -29)
5 Quick Reference Guide - Copy (-29) - 1
6 Quick Reference Guide - Printer (-29) - 1
7 Quick Reference Guide - Scanner (-29) - 1
Quick Reference Guide - App 2 Me

8 - 1
(-17, -19, -29)
9 CD-ROM - Instruction (-17, -29) 1 -
CD-ROM: Printer Instruction for D011/D013 only

10 1 -
(-17, -27, -28, -29)
CD-ROM: Scanner Instruction for D011/D013 only (-17,

11 1 -
-27, -28, -29)
12 CD-ROM: Printer/ Scanner (-27, -29) - 1
CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - User

13 - 1
(-17, -19, -29)
30
D009/D011/
Description D091/D092
D012/D013
CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - Administrator

14 - 1
(-17, -19, -29)
15
CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - App 2 Me
- 1 2
(-17, -19, -29)
16 CD-ROM: SDK (-17, -19, -27, -29) - 1
17 CD-ROM: P2600 (-17, -19, -27, -29) - 1
18 CD-ROM: Driver (-19, only) - 1
19 Model Name Decal (-17, -29) 1 1
20 Emblem Cover 1 1
21 Stamp (-17) 1 1
22 Cloth Holder 1 1
23 Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth 1 1
24 Operating Instructions Holder 1 1
25 Ferrite Core 1 1
26 Rivet 1 1
27 Power Supply Cord 1 1
28 Decal - Paper Tray 1 1
29 Decal - Caution - Original (-17) 1 1
30 Sheet - EULA: 16 Languages 1 1
31 Sheet - Caution: 16 Languages 1 1
32 Sheet: NECR (-17) 1 1
33 Sheet - Warranty: Chinese (-21) 1 -
34 Sheet - Name - Tel (-21) 1 -
31
2. Installation
Installation Procedure
Preliminary Procedures
Put the machine on the paper feed unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional paper feed unit or the
optional LCT at the same time. Then install the machine and other options.
2
• Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you
transport the machine to another location.
1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.

2. Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2, and then take out the power cord from tray 1 (if
applicable).
3. Remove the scanner unit stay [1].
4. Open the front door [2], and then remove the jam location sheet [3].
5. Keep the scanner unit stay [1] inside the front door [2].
6. Reattach the jam location sheet.
7. Close the front door.
32
8. Attach the correct emblem [4] and the cover [5] to the front door [6] of the machine, if the emblem is
not attached.
• If you want to change the emblem that has been already attached, remove the panel with a
small screwdriver as shown [7], and then install the correct emblem.
9. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [8].
• Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper feed unit or LCT. Keep
these decals for use with these optional units.
10. Pull out the feeler [9] for the output tray full detection mechanism.
33
2. Installation
Fire Prevention Cover
When the copier is installed on the floor without the optional paper tray unit or a table, the cover [1] must
be attached to the copier.
• Install the cover [1] at the right side of the copier.
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit)
1. Open the front door.

2. Open the right door [1].
3. Release the lock lever [2].
34
4. Pull out the PCDU [3] and place it on a clean flat surface.
5. Remove the two stoppers [4].

6. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
• Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic
development roller.
7. Remove the opening cap [5], and then install it in the opening [6] of the PCDU.
35
2. Installation
8. Open the PCU [6] ( x 2).
9. Remove the entrance seal plate [7] ( x 2).

10. Remove the development roller unit [8], and set it on the paper.
11. Pour the developer [9] into the development unit.
36
• The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer package. Do not discard
the package until you have recorded the lot number. ( p.194 "Developer")
1) Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer evenly along the length of the development unit.
2) Rotate the drive gear [10] to work the developer into the unit.
3) Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit. 2
4) Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the unit.
12. Put the opening cap [4] back in its original place.
13. Reassemble the PCDU.
14. Re-install the PCDU.
Toner Bottle

2. Turn the toner bottle holder lever [1] counterclockwise, push down the lever [2], and then pull out the
toner bottle holder [3].
3. Hold the toner bottle [5] horizontally, and shake it 5 or 6 times.
4. Unscrew the bottle cap [4] and set the bottle [5] in the holder.
5. Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place.
6. Turn the toner bottle holder lever [1] clockwise to lock it.
37
2. Installation
Paper Trays
1. Open the 1st paper tray, and then press down on the right side of the lock switch to unlock the side
fences.
2. Press in on the sides of the fence release, and slide the side fences to the appropriate mark for the
paper size.
2 3. Pinch the sides of the end fence and move it to the appropriate mark for the paper size, then load the
paper.
4. Check the position of the stack.
• Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences. If you see a gap, adjust the
position of the side fences.
5. Press down the lock to lock the side fences.
6. Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray.
Initialize TD Sensor and Developer

1. Connect the main machine to the power outlet, switch on the main machine, and wait for the fusing
unit to warm up.
2. Enter Copy SP Mode.
3. Press SP Direct to highlight "SP Direct", enter 2801, and then press .
4. When the message prompts you to enter the lot number of the developer, enter the 7-digit lot number,
press [Yes], and then press [Execute] on the touch-panel. This initializes the TD sensor.
• The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package. Recording the lot number could
help troubleshoot problems later. If the lot number is unavailable, enter any seven-digit number.
5. Press SP Direct to highlight "SP Direct" and enter 2805, press , and then press "Execute" on the
touch-panel. This initializes the developer.
6. Press "Exit" twice to return to the copy window.
Set Paper Size for Paper Trays

1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
3. Press the "Paper Size Setting" tab.
4. Press the button for the tray to change.
5. Change the setting and press the [OK] button.
6. Repeat for each tray installed.
38
7. Press Exit twice to return to the main display

• The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paper trays are provided with the paper size switches. The detected
paper size by the paper size switches has priority over the UP settings. However, if you change
the "Auto Detect" with the UP setting, you can select the paper size.
8. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
Electrical Total Counter

2
The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization. The new incrementing counter is set to "0" at
the factory.
Exposure Glass Cleaner
1. Attach the exposure glass cleaner holder [1] to the left side of the machine.
2. Place the exposure glass cleaner [2] inside the holder.
• The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass, the glass strip to the left of the
large exposure glass.
39
2. Installation
Operation Instructions Holder
1. Attach the operation instructions holder [1] to the left side of the copier (snap rivet x 2).
2. If a finisher has been installed, attach the operation instructions holder [2] to the rear side of the finisher
(snap rivet x 2).
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract.
Item SP No. Function Default
Specifies whether the counter is

A3/11" x 17" SP5-104-001 doubled for A3/11" x 17" paper. "No": Single
double counting (SSP) When you have to change this setting, counting
contact your supervisor.
5812-002 programs the service station

fax number. The number is printed on the
Service Tel. No. SP5-812-001
counter list when the meter charge mode
Setting through 004
is selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service station.
App 2 Me Setting (D091/D092 only)

D091/D092 models have VM Card including "App 2 Me" provider by default. Do the following procedure
if a customer want to use the "App 2 Me".
1. Press "User Tools" key on the operation panel.
40
2. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.

3. Touch the "App 2 Me" line in the Startup Setting tab.
4. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
5. Touch the "App 2 Me" line.
6. Set the setting of "Auto Start" to "On".
7. Touch the "Exit" button. 2
8. Exit the "User Tools" settings.
Update Procedure for App 2 Me Provider
1. Push the "User/Tools" key.
2. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 2 and 3 are required. Otherwise, skip to
step 4.
3. Push the "Login/Logout" key.
4. Login with the administrator user name and password.
5. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
6. Touch the all applications. Then, the status will be changed to "Stop".
7. Turn off the machine. And then remove the VM Card.
8. Prepare newer App 2 Me Provider zip file from Firmware Download Center. Unzip the zip file. (The
folder name is "337051920".) And then copy the App 2 Me Provider folder in the specified path of
VM card. The path is "SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920" as shown above.
9. Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a
click.
10. Turn on the main power switch.
41
2. Installation
11. Press the "User Tools" key on the operation panel.

12. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
13. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on LCD.
14. Touch the "App2Me" line.
15. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".
2 16. Touch the "Exit" button.

17. Exit the "User Tools/Counter" settings.
Moving the Machine
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section
"Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
1. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
Transporting the Machine
1. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust from falling
into the machine during transportation.
2. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of
paper and tape.
3. Do one of the following:
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
42
Paper Feed Unit Installation (D351)

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
2
No. Description Q'ty
1 Securing bracket 2
2 Screw (M4x10) 2
3 Spring Washer Screw 1
4 Knob screw 3
• Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation
procedure.
• You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause injury or property damage.
• Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged.
43
2. Installation
1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding.
3. Grasp the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine.

4. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [3].
• Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
44
5. Remove the tray 1 and 2 of the machine.

6. Fasten the Spring Washer Screw [4].
7. Reinstall all trays.
8. Attach the securing brackets [5] ( x 1 each; M4x10).
45
2. Installation
• One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool (the cutout [6] is used in step 6). But the
cutout [7] is for attaching the tray heater. Therefore, attach the securing brackets [5] after
installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater.
9. Load paper into the paper feed unit.
2 10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.

11. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality.
46
LCT 2000-Sheet
LCT 2000-Sheet
Accessory Check
2
1 Securing bracket 2
2 Screw (M4x10) 2
3 Spring washer screw 1
4 Knob screw 3
• Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation
procedure.
• You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause injury or property damage.
• Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged.
47
2. Installation
1. Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT.
2. Grasp the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine.

3. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [3].
• Hold the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
48
LCT 2000-Sheet
4. Remove the tray 1 and 2 of the machine.

5. Fasten the Spring Washer Screw [4].
6. Reinstall all trays.
7. Attach the securing brackets [5] ( x 1 each; M4x10).
• One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool (the cutout [6] is used in step 5). But the
cutout [7] is for attaching the tray heater. Therefore, attach the securing brackets [2] after
installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater.
49
2. Installation
8. Load paper into the LCT.

9. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
10. Check the LCT operation and copy quality.
50
1200-Sheet LCT (D353)

Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
2
1 Front Bracket 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Stud Screw 4
4 Joint Pin 2
5 LCT 1
Installation procedure
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
51
2. Installation
• The Paper Tray Unit (D351) or LCT 2000-sheet (D352) must be installed before installing this 1200-
sheet LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Remove the stand covers [1].
3. Release the locks [2] of the front and rear caster stands.
4. Remove the caster stands [3].
5. Remove the paper path cover [4], connector cover [5] and six hole covers [6].
52
6. Insert the joint pins [7].

7. Attach the front [8] and rear brackets [9].
8. Pull out the front and rear rails [10], and then hang them on each bracket [11].
9. Connect the LCT cable [12] to the main machine.
10. Slide the LCT [13] into the main machine.
11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine.
53
2. Installation
Auto Reverse Document Feeder (B802)

Component Check
2
1 ARDF 1
2 Attention Decal Sheet – Top Cover 1
3 Stamp 1
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Stud Screw 2
6 Platen Sheet 1
• Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
54
1. Remove the all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Insert the two stud screws [1] on the top of the machine.
3. Mount the ARDF [2] by aligning the screw keyholes [3] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [4].
55
2. Installation
6. Remove two screws [5] form the bottom of the ARDF.

7. Remove all tapes on the ARDF.
8. Place the platen sheet [6] on the exposure glass.

9. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [7] on the exposure glass.
10. Close the ARDF.
11. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
56
12. Open the ARDF cover [8].

13. Open the feed-in guide plate [9] and feed-out guide plate [10].
14. Install the stamp [11] into the ARDF.
15. Close two guide plates [10] [9].
16. Close the ARDF cover [8].
57
2. Installation
17. Attach the decal [12] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language you want.
18. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation.
19. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew
are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew referring to the "Copy Adjustments"
in the section of the "Replacements and Adjustments".
58
Platen Cover Installation (G329)
Platen Cover Installation (G329)
1. Install screws [1] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown.

2. Position the platen cover bracket [2] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen cover [3]
to the left.
59
2. Installation
1-Bin Tray Unit (D389)

Component Check
2
1 1-Bin Tray Unit 1
2 End-fence 1
3 Tray Support Bar 1
4 Screws (M3 x 16) 3
5 Tray 1
• If the bridge unit (D386) has already been installed on the machine, remove it before installing 1-bin
tray unit (D389). This makes it easy to do the following procedure.
60
1-Bin Tray Unit (D389)
1. Remove all tapes.

2. Open the right door of the machine.
3. Remove the front right cover [1] ( x 1).
4. Remove the paper exit cover [2] ( x 1).
• Keep this screw for step 5.
5. Install the 1-bin tray unit [3] ( x 1, x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]).
61
2. Installation
6. Attach the tray support bar [4] to the tray [5] as shown, and then attach the end-fence [6].
7. Install the tray [7] with the tray support bar on the machine ( x 3; M3 x 16).
8. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
10. Check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
62
Bridge Unit (D386)
Bridge Unit (D386)

Component Check
2
No. Description Q’ty
1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Knob screw 1
3 Long Knob Screw 1
4 Holder bracket 1
5 Guide 2
• If you will install the 1-bin tray (D389) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the
bridge unit (D386). This makes it easy to do the following procedure.
63
2. Installation
• If you will install the finisher unit (B408, B804 or B805) on the machine, install it after installing the
bridge unit (D386).
1. Remove all tapes.

2. If the sensor feeler [1] is out, fold it into the machine.
3. Open the right door of the machine.
4. Remove the upper inner tray [2].

5. Remove the front right cover [3] ( x 1).
6. Remove the connector cover [4] ( x 1).
64
Bridge Unit (D386)
7. Attach the two guides [5] to the cutouts [6] in the inner tray.
8. Install the bridge unit [7] in the machine.
65
2. Installation
9. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [8] and knob screw [9].
10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
• Open the bridge unit cover [10] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, you cannot
reinstall it.
11. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
• Holder bracket [11] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (B408, B804 or B805).Do
not install it at this time.
13. Check the bridge unit operation.
66
2000/3000-Sheet Finishers (B804/B805)

Accessory Check
2
1 Rear joint bracket 1
2 Front joint bracket 1
3 Ground (earth) plate 1
4 Tapping screws - M4 x14 4
5 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 1
6 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 2 (B804) or 6 (B805)*1
7 Upper output tray 1
8 Support Tray 1
9 Lower output tray (B804 only) 1
10 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1
11 Small ground (earth) plate (B805 only)*2 2
*1: Four of these six screws are not used for this model.
*2: Item No.11 is not used for this model.
67
2. Installation
If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing this finisher.
• Bridge Unit (D886)
• Paper Feed Unit (D351) or LCT (D352)
68
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
2. Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher.
69
2. Installation
3. Pull out the jogger unit [1], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
4. Attach the cushion [2] to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
5. Install the ground plate [3] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6).
70
6. Attach the rear joint bracket [4] ( x 2; M4 x 14).

7. Attach the front joint bracket [5] and the holder bracket [6] ( x 2; M4 x 14).
• Holder bracket [6] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [5]. This bracket is provided
with the Bridge Unit (D386).
8. Pull the lock lever [7] ( x 1).

9. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the brackets
[4] [5] go into their slots.
10. Push the lock lever [7], and then secure it ( x 1).
71
2. Installation
11. Close the front door of the finisher.

12. Connect the finisher connector [8] to the machine.
13. Install the upper output tray [9] ( x 1; M3 x 8).

14. Only for B804, install the lower output tray [10].
16. Check the finisher operation.
72
Support Tray Installation
If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [1], put the support tray [2] on the tray
as shown.
• Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed.
73
2. Installation
Punch Unit
The Punch Unit B702 can be installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805.
Component Check
2 Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1 Punch-out Waste Unit 1
2 Slide Drive Unit 1
3 Punch Waste Hopper 1
4 Screws (M3 x 6) 5
5 Side-to-Side Detection Unit 1
6 Punching Unit 1
74
Punch Unit
• Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 2000/3000-
sheet booklet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [1] and move the finisher
away from the copier.
2. Remove the rear cover [2] ( x 2) and open the front door.
• At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the cover to the
frame.
3. Remove the guide plate [3] ( x 2).
75
2. Installation
4. Remove the bracket [4] from the punch unit ( x 3).
5. Move the punch unit [5] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at
the front and rear.
6. Connect the cables [6] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch unit board
( x 2, x 1).
• The cables [6] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
76
Punch Unit
7. Attach the slide drive unit [7] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in
the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw .
8. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
9. Put the side-to-side detection unit [8] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly
at the front.
10. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that
the rails are aligned with their grooves.
11. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
12. Pull the short connector [9] out of the connector [10], then connect the cable [10] of the finisher
( x 1).
77
2. Installation
• This is the 3-pin connector.
13. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [11] of the cover.
14. Install the punch-waste transport unit [12] in the finisher.
15. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure
that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
16. Remove the short connector [13] from the connector [14].
• This is the 4-pin connector.

17. Connect the cable [14] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1, x 1).
78
Punch Unit
18. Set the hopper [15] in its holder.

19. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine.
20. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on.
21. Check the punch unit operation.
79
2. Installation
1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

Accessory Check
2
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Front Joint Bracket 1
2 Screw - M4 x 14 4 (Use 4)
3 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1
4 Copy Tray 1
5 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1
6 Screw - M3 x 8 1
7 Rear Joint Bracket 1
8 Grounding Plate 1
9 Staple Position Decal 1
10 Rear Joint Bracket 1 ---
= Necessary, --- = Not necessary
80
If this finisher is installed, the Bridge Unit (D386) and Paper Feed Unit (D351) or LCT (D352) must be
installed before installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
• Be sure to keep screw [1] shown at the top left drawing above. It will be needed to secure the
grounding plate later in this procedure.
81
2. Installation
2. Install the front joint bracket [2] / holder bracket [3] ( x 2; M4 x 14) and rear joint bracket [4]
( x 2; M4 x 14).
• The holder bracket [3] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [2]. The holder bracket [3]
is provided with the Bridge Unit (D386).
82
3. Install the grounding plate [5] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8)
• Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4. Open the front door [6] then pull the locking lever [7].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw; M3 x 8).
8. Install the copy tray [8] (1 knob screw; M4 x 10).
9. Connect the finisher cable [9] to the main machine as shown above.
83
2. Installation
10. Attach the staple position decal [10] to the ARDF as shown.
11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
84
Key Counter Bracket
Key Counter Bracket

1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [1] on the inside of the key counter bracket [2] and insert the key
counter holder [3].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
3. Install the key counter cover [4] ( x 2).
85
2. Installation
4. Rear cover [5] ( x 5)
5. Cut off the part [6] of the rear cover.
6. Connect the harness to CN211 [7] on the IOB ( x 3).
86
Key Counter Bracket
7. Peel off the double-sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner
right cover [8].
8. Reassemble the machine.
87
2. Installation
Key Counter Interface Unit

88
Key Counter Interface Unit
2. Install the key counter interface board in the location [2] ( x 4).
3. Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board.
4. Connect the other terminal of the harness to CN214 [3] on the IOB ( x 3).
5. Cut off the part [4] of the rear cover.
89
2. Installation
6. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board and clamp
it with three clamps [5].
90
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)

1. Remove the ARDF or platen cover (see "ARDF" or "Platen Cover" in the "Installation" section.)
2. Rear cover ( p.154) 2
3. ARDF exposure glass and exposure glass with left scale ( p.159).
4. Scanner rear frame ( p.163).
5. Move the scanner carriage [1] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor.
6. Install the heater [2] in the scanner unit ( x 2, x 1)
7. Put the cable through the cutout [3].
91
2. Installation
8. Release the heater relay cable [4] ( x 1).
9. Route the heater relay cable [5] as shown ( x 3).
92
10. Connect the heater cable [6] to the heater relay cable ( x 1).
93
2. Installation
Tray Heater
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Connect the connector [1] of the heater to the connector [2] of the main machine.
3. Install the heater [3] inside the machine ( x 1).
4. Remove the connector cover [4] ( x 1).
94
Tray Heater
5. Release the heater relay connector [5] ( x 1).

6. Connect the heater relay connector to the connector [6] (front side) of the main frame ( x 1).
95
2. Installation
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)

Component Check

2
1 Tray heater 1
2 On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91)
3 Harness 2 (For G832) 1
4 Harness 1 (For B800/B801) 1
5 Screw M4 x 10 2
- Installation procedure 1
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
96
For installing the tray heater in the D351 (Two-tray paper feed unit)
1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( x 6).
2. Pull out the two trays from the optional paper feed unit.
3. Install the tray heater [1] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
4. Remove the two securing brackets [2] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [3] of the optional paper
feed unit ( x 2).
97
2. Installation
5. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.

6. Replace the shoulder screw [4] with the washer screw [5], using the securing bracket [6] ( x 1).
7. Connect the harness [7] to the connector [8] of the tray heater.
8. Route the harness [7] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
9. Connect the harness [7] to the connector [9] of the mainframe.
98
11. Release the optional heater relay connector [11] ( x 1).

12. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [12] (rear side) of the main frame (
x 1).
13. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
99
2. Installation
14. Attach the on/standby decal [13] to the right-hand side of the main power switch.
For installing the tray heater in the D352 (LCT)

1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( x 6).
2. Pull out the LCT drawer.
• If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
3. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
100
4. Remove the right tray [2] while pressing down the stopper [3].
• When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in,
making sure to keep the tray level.
5. Install the tray heater [4] in the optional LCT ( x 1).
101
2. Installation
6. Remove the two securing brackets [5] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [6] of the optional LCT
( x 2).
7. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.

8. Replace the shoulder screw [7] with the washer screw [8], using the securing bracket [9] ( x 1).
102
9. Connect the harness [10] to the connector [11] of the tray heater.
10. Route the harness [10] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
11. Connect the harness [10] to the connector [12] of the mainframe.
103
2. Installation
13. Release the optional heater relay connector [14] ( x 1).

14. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [15] (rear side) of the main frame (
x 1).
15. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
16. Attach the on/standby decal [16] to the right-hand side of the main power switch.
104
HDD Option (D362, only for D009/D012)

Component Check
No. Description Q'ty For D009/D012

2
1 HDD Unit 1
2 Screw 3
Keytop: Copy 2
3
Keytop: Document Server 2
- Knob Screw 3 ---
= Necessary, --- = Not necessary
105
2. Installation
1. Remove the controller board [1] ( x 2).
2. Install the HDD unit [2] in the controller board ( x 3).

3. Reinstall the controller board in the machine.
4. Remove the dummy keytops (top and second from the top).
5. Install the copy and document server keytops.
106
After Installing the HDD

1. Do SP5832-001 to format the hard disk.
2. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
3. Do SP5846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board.
4. Do SP5846-041 to let the user get access to the address book.
5. Turn the main power switch off/on. 2
107
2. Installation
Copy Data Security Unit

2 • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
2. Controller unit [2] ( x 2)
108
Copy Data Security Unit
3. Controller box [3] ( x 6)
4. Attach the ICIB-1 (copy data security board) to CN 111 [4] on the BICU ( x 2).
User Tool Setting

1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
2. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Data Security for
Copying > "On".
3. Exit the User Tools.
4. Check the operation.
109
2. Installation
• The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-1 removed
and the "Data Security for Copying" feature is set to "ON".
• When you remove this option from the machine, first set the setting to "OFF" with the user tool
before removing this board. If you forget to do this, "Data Security for Copying" feature cannot
appear in the user tool settings. And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched
2 on, and the machine cannot be used.
5. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( Check All Connections at the end of this
section).
110
Controller Options
Controller Options
Controller Board Slots
The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card slots. Make sure that each board and SD
card is put in the correct slot. 2
The names of the slots for the board and SD cards are embossed on the face of the controller plate.
111
2. Installation
SD Slot 1, Slot 2
Slot SD Card
RPCS Printer Unit

Printer Unit
2 [1]
Printer/Scanner Unit
Data Overwrite Security
PostScript3
IPDS Unit
• Service slot for firmware version updates

• Installing the optional browser unit, VM card or HDD encryption unit
[2]
• Moving applications to an SD card in slot 1
• Downloading/uploading NVRAM contents
Board Slot
Slot Board
• File Format Converter (MLB): D377

• Bluetooth Interface Unit: B826
[3] • IEEE 802.11a/g, g: D377
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board: B679
• Gigabit Ethernet: G874
• Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.
IEEE1284
• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
112
Controller Options
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless
LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [1] from the board slot ( x 2).
2. Install the interface board (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).
IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN)
LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
113
2. Installation
2. Install the wireless LAN board (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this
section).
4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [2], and then attach them [2] at the front left
and rear right of the machine.
5. Attach the "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) to the front left of the machine.
6. Attach the "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) to the rear right of the machine.
114
Controller Options
• "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach

them at the wrong places.
7. Attach the clamps as shown above.
8. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 8).
2
• Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates
strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11a/
g, g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
• You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
• The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc", "Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 to 14 (default: 11)
• The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless
data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
115
2. Installation
Selects "Active" or "Inactive". ("Inactive" is default.)

Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the transmission speed
2 for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match
the distance between the closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
• For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network.
For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest access
point.
11 Mbps: 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps: 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps: 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps: 400 m (437 yd.)
10. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g, g Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g, g.
SP No. Name Function
5840-006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
5840-007 Channel MIN
country.
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
116
Controller Options
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
WEP Mode
for the WEP Key entry.
2
Bluetooth
LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394, Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [1] from the board Slot ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board (Knob-screw x 2) into the board slot.
3. Insert the Bluetooth card into the Bluetooth card adaptor.
4. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card.
5. Install the Bluetooth card adaptor into the Bluetooth board.
6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).
117
2. Installation
Gigabit Ethernet
2 LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394, Bluetooth).
2. Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws.
3. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2.0:
User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
File Format Converter
118
Controller Options
1. Remove the slot cover [1] from the board slot ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter into the board slot, and then fasten it with screws.
4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No. Title Setting
SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1"
SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0"
5. Check the operation.

6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).
PostScript 3
119
2. Installation
1. Remove the slot cover [1] ( x 1).

2. Turn the SD-card label face [2] to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear
a click.
3. Attach the slot cover [1] ( x 1).
4. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [3] to the front door.
5. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( "Check All Connections" at the end of this
section).
120
Controller Options
IPDS Unit
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
No. Description Q'ty 2

1 IPDS Emulation SD Card 1
2 Decal 1
• Only one slot (C1) is available for SD cards that contain applications. If you want to use more than
one application, merge all applications into one SD card (SP5873-001).
Installation
1. Check the software version.
• Make sure the following versions are installed:
Firmware Name Version Firmware Number
NCS V7.12 or later D0135754D
Websys V1.09 or later D0135755D
Printer V1.05 or later D0135758G
System/Copy
V1.08 or later D0135751P
(For D011/D013/D091/D092)
System/Copy
V1.08 or later D0125751P
(For D009/D012)
IPDS V4.732 or later D0125756A
2. If necessary, update the firmware to the version(s) listed above.

3. Turn off the main switch.
121
2. Installation

5. Insert the IPDS SD Card [2] into slot 1.
• If slot 1 is occupied, insert it in to slot 2, then merge this application into slot 1.
• Pushing in the SD Card releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked
in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
6. Reattach the slot cover and turn ON the main switch.
7. Do one of the following ("A" or "B") to enable the IPDS function.
A. [Enable the IPDS function via telnet]
1. Connect the machine via telnet.
2. Execute the following commands:
msh> set ipds up
***If you want to stop the function.
msh> set ipds down
B. [Enable the IPDS option via WebImageMonitor]
1. Log in to WebImageMonitor.
2. Change the setting to enable IPDS.
122
Controller Options
8. Attach the decal [1] as shown in the photo above.

• Line up the left side of the decal with the left edged of the main power switch. ([2]: 10 mm or
more)
HDD Encryption Unit
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
• These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools] > "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off", tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do the installation
procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication Management">
"Available Settings"
123
2. Installation
• "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done.

If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the
installation procedure.
2 Seal Check and Removal
• You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in
the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [1] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
2. Open the box.
1. For models which have the VM card, do the followings:
• Press "User Tools" button to enter the User Tools mode.
124
Controller Options
• Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD.
• Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD again.
• Press "Startup Setting" tab.

• Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines.
• Exit the UP mode, and then turn off the machine.
• Remove the VM card from slot 2.
125
2. Installation

3. Turn the SD-card label [2] to face the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear
a click.
4. Turn on the main power switch, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
6. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
7. Turn off the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
126
Controller Options
Recovery from a Device Problem
Restoring the encryption key

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed,
updating the encryption key is required.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Ask an administrator to input the encryption key (this has been printed out earlier by the user) into the
"nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Remove only the HDD unit ( p.243).
7. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.
9. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into slot 2.
10. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash
memory on the controller board.
11. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
13. Reinstall the HDD unit.
127
2. Installation
Clearing the NVRAM

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed and
a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the NVRAM is required to recover the HDD encryption
unit.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
2 3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.
8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into slot 2.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash
memory on the controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-001) and HDD unit (SP5832-001) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type I (D362)
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Confirm that the DataOverwriteSecurity unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The correct
type for this machine is "Type I".
• If you install any version other than "Type I", you will have to replace the NVRAM and do this
installation procedure again.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
128
Controller Options
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed
before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is ON.
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin.
Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure.
4. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).
2
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available
Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before
you do the installation procedure.
Seal Check and Removal
• You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in
the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [1] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install the
components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the box.
129
2. Installation
3. You can see the "VOID" marks [2] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be
attached to the box again.
• You must install the DataOverwriteSecurity unit in SD Card slot 1. However, the Postscript option and
others are also installed in SD Card slot 1. You must do the "SD Card Appli Move" procedure first if
you want to install the DataOverwriteSecurity unit.
1. Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on.
2. Disconnect the network cable if it is connected.
130
Controller Options
3. Remove the slot cover [1] for SD cards ( x 1).

a click.
5. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
7. Go into the SP mode and push "EXECUTE" with SP5-878-001.
8. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
9. Turn on the machine power.
10. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
11. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic report are the same
as those in area [b].
• [a]: "ROM Number/Firmware Version" – "HDD Format Option"
• [b]: "Loading Program" – "GW2a_zoffy"
"ROM No. / Firmware

Diagnostic Report: "Loading Program" [b]
Version" [a]
HDD Format Option: GW2a_zoffy:

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
D3775912 / 1.00m D3775912 / 1.00m
131
2. Installation
• The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded.
However, the important thing is to make sure the numbers in [a] are the same as the numbers in
[b].
• If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this means the
unit was not installed correctly.
2 If this happens:
Make sure of the unit type (must be Type I).
If they do not match:
1) Replace the NV-RAM on the controller.
2) Replace the "DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" (SD card) with the correct type
3) Do the installation procedure in this procedure again, from Step 1.
12. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto Erase Memory
Setting> On.
13. Exit the User Tools mode.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [1] shows.
15. Make a Sample Copy.
16. Check the overwrite erase icon.
• The icon [2] changes to [3] when job data is stored in the HDD.
• The icon goes back to its usual shape [2] after this function has completed a data overwriting in
the HDD.
Browser Unit Type D
This option requires a HDD unit.
132
Controller Options
SD card slot 2 is basically used only for service maintenance and VM card. Do not leave an SD card in
slot 2 after installing an application.
133
2. Installation

• Remove the VM card from slot 2.

a click.
5. Push the "User Tools" key.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, steps 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise, skip
to step 7.
6. Push the "Login/Logout" key.
9. Touch "Install" on the LCD.
10. Touch "SD Card".
11. Touch the "Browser" line.
12. Under "Install to", touch "Machine HDD" and touch "Next".
13. When you see "Ready to Install", check the information on the screen to confirm your previous
selection.
14. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
134
Controller Options
16. Touch "Change Allocation".

17. Touch the "Browser" line.
18. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. By default, this function is
assigned to the "Other Functions" key (bottom key of the function keys).
19. Touch "OK".
20. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen.
2
22. Install the key for "Browser Unit" to the place where you want it.
25. Tell a customer to keep the SD card in a safe place ( p.279) after you have installed the application
program from the card to the HDD.
This is because:
• The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Update Procedure
a click.
4. Push the "User Tools" key.
If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise, skip to
step 7.
5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
8. Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
9. Touch the "Browser" line
10. A confirmation message appears on the LCD.
11. Touch "Yes" to proceed.
12. A reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.
13. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
14. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
135
2. Installation
15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.

16. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
17. Remove the SD card from the SD card slot 2.
18. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
19. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
2
VM Card Type F (D377)
This option is only for D009/D011/D012/D013 models.
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
Description Q'ty
1. VM SD Card 1
2. Decal 1
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
136
Controller Options
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [1] ( x1).

3. Insert the SD card [2] into slot 2 (lower).
• This SD card must be inserted into slot 2, the lower slot.
Printer and P/S Options (only for D009/D012) 2
Overview
This section describes the installation of the following items:
• RPCS Printer Unit
• Printer Unit
• Printer/Scanner Unit
• 256 Memory. Optional memory is required for each unit.
• Printer Enhance Option
• Scanner Enhance Option
137
2. Installation
Three Main Units

• RPCS Printer Unit Type 5000:
For customers who require only basic copying and printing and the RPCS printer language. The 256
MB memory is required.
• Printer Unit Type 5000:
For customers who do not require the extended scanning features but need more printing capability
(both RPCS and PCL printer languages are provided). The 256 MB memory is required.
• Printer/Scanner Unit Type 5000:
For customers who require the full range of DS features (advanced scanning and printing features
such as "scan-to" solutions, virtual mailboxes, PCL, etc.). The 256 MB memory unit is required.
Separate Options
There are two separate options not provided with the kits: 256 MB memory and PS3.
• 256 MB memory:
Not provided with any option. However, every unit (RPCS, Printer Unit, P/S unit) requires installation
of the 256 MB memory.
138
Controller Options
• PostScript 3 Unit:
The PS3 option can be used with the RPCS Unit, the Printer Unit, or the Printer/Scanner Unit.
Enhance Options
There are two enhance options:
• Printer Enhance Option Type 5000:
Updates the RPCS unit by adding PCL. 2
• Scanner Enhance Option Type 5000:
Updates the RPCS unit or Printer Unit by adding the advanced scanning features.
Kit Contents
Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and the illustration on the next page. This
is a common list for all the kits.
Common Accessory Table
This common accessory table lists all the items of the following units and options for the D009/D012 Series
machines:
• RPCS: RPCS Printer Unit
• PU: Printer Unit
• P/S: Printer/Scanner Unit
• PEO: Printer Enhance Unit
• SEO: Scanner Enhance Unit
139
2. Installation
Kit Contents
RPCS PU P/S PEO SEO
256 MB Memory*1 - No No No No No
1 HDD Unit 1 No Yes Yes Yes No

2 2 Screw 3 No Yes Yes Yes No
3 SD Card 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Keytop Set: NA*2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

4
Keytop Set: EU*2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1: The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits. However, one memory unit is
required for the installation of every print unit.
*2: The number of keytops provided varies:
Keytops
Kit
Copy Document Server Printer Scanner
RPCS Unit 1 1
Printer Unit 1 1 1
Printer/Scanner Unit 1 1 1 1
Printer Enhance Unit 1
Scanner Enhance Unit 1
Printer/Scanner Installation
• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord.
140
Controller Options
1. Remove the controller board [1] ( x 2).
2. Install the 256 MB memory DIMM [2].

3. Install a hard disk (except RPCS Printer Kit). ( p.105)
4. Reinstall the controller board.
141
2. Installation
5. Remove the SD card slot cover [3] ( x1).

6. Insert the Printer/Scanner SD card [4] in SD card slot 1.
7. Reattach the cover.
8. Connect the LAN cable to the "NIC" connection.
9. Connect the USB cable to the "USB" connection.
10. Remove the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th blank key tops.
• The 3rd blank keytop from the top is reserved for the "Fax" keytop. Do not remove it at this time.
142
Controller Options
11. Replace the blank keytops:

• 1: Copy
• 2: Document Server
• 3: Printer
• 4: Scanner
12. Connect the machine’s power cord and turn the main power switch on. 2
13. Enable the NIB and/or USB function.
• To enable the NIB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-001 (On Board NIC) to
"1" (Enable).
• To enable the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On Board USB) to
"1" (Enable).
Printer Enhance, Scanner Enhance Options

Accessory Check
Refer to the "Common Accessory Table" in this chapter.
Installation (Application Merge)
The installation of the printer enhance option and scanner enhance option are done with SP5873-001
(Application Move).
• If you are going to update the RPCS unit with both the printer and scanner enhance options, the order
of execution is not important.
143
2. Installation

2. Turn off the copier.
3. Remove the cover ( x1).
4. Remove the VM card from SD card slot 2 if installed.
5. Confirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1.
6. Put the option SD Card (Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option) in SD card slot 2.
8. Turn the copier on.
9. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873-001.
10. Touch "Execute".
11. Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start.
12. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit", then turn the copier off.
13. Remove the option SD card from slot 2.
144
Controller Options
14. Turn the copier on.

15. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that update was successful.
16. User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
17. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
18. Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping, or tape it to the faceplate of the controller.
To undo an option update 2
145
2. Installation

2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Remove the cover ( x1).
4. Remove the VM card from SD card slot 2 if installed.
5. Confirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot 1.
6. Put the original option SD card (Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option) in SD card slot
2.
7. Turn the main switch on.
8. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
9. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
11. Remove the option SD card from Slot 2.
13. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that undo was successful.
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
14. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
Important Notes about SD Cards
Here are some basic rules about merging applications on SD cards.
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD
card.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program. The
service technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems. SD
cards must be stored in a safe location at the work site.
• Once the merge is completed, the SD card from which the application was copied cannot be used
again, but the customer must keep the card to serve as proof of purchase.
146
Controller Options
• An SD card from which an application has been moved to another SD card can be restored to full
operation with SP5873-002 (Undo).
• Before storing the card from which an application has been copied, label it carefully so that you can
identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure later.
Application Merge
This machine has two SD card slots only. However, more than two optional applications are supplied for
this machine. Always keep SD card slot 2 vacant for servicing (except VM Card Type F). Because of this, 2
SD card merge is required if a customer wants to use many applications.
Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
• PostScript3 cannot be moved to the other SD card.
• Due to limitations, the VM Card (D377) can be neither merged nor moved to another SD card. This
card must be installed in Slot 2 (lower).
• The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards. Refer
to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
SD Card Options SD Card Size Module Size
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 5000 32 MB 9.3 MB
RPCS Printer Unit Type 5000 32 MB 6.3 MB
Printer Unit Type 5000 32 MB 8.3 MB
Printer Enhance Option Type 5000 16 MB 4 MB
Scanner Enhance Option Type 5000 16 MB 3 MB
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type I 16 MB 4 MB
PostScript3 Unit Type 5000 64 MB 14.6 MB
IPDS Unit Type 5000 32 MB 13.5 MB
Case 1: PostScript3 is not installed

Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into one SD card (Destination Card).
• The destination card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards.
• The VM Card Type F cannot be merged, nor moved to another SD card. This card must be installed
in slot 2.
Case 2: PostScript3 is installed
Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into the PostScript3 SD card.
147
2. Installation
Check All Connections
Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.

Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
2 All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
148
PM Tables
• PM Tables
149
150
General Cautions
• To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is removed or re-installed,
never turn off power switch while electrical components are active.
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in
this section.
4
Laser Unit
1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so would
throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment.
Used Toner
Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame, for
toner dust may ignite.
151
Special Tools and Lubricants

Special Tools
Part Number Description Q’ty
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pc./set) 1
A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pc./set) 1
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 187 1

4 A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
B6455010 SD Card 1
B6456830 USB Read/Writer 1
G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1
Lubricants
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1
52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 1
152
Exterior Covers
Exterior Covers
Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover
1. Left Cover ( p.154)
2. Open and remove the front door [A] (pin x 2).
Upper Inner Cover

1. Open the front door [A].
2. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
Lower Inner Cover

1. Remove the front door [A] (pin x 2)
2. Shield glass cover [C]
3. Shield glass [D] ( x 2)
4. Lower inner cover [E]
153
Left Cover
1. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
Rear Cover
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6)
154
Exterior Covers
Right Rear Cover
1. Rear cover( p.154)
2. Open the right door [A].

3. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Right top cover [C] ( x 1)
5. Right rear cover [D] ( x 4)
155
Operation Panel
1. Open the right door.

2. Front right cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Operation panel with the scanner front cover [B] ( x 6, x 1, x 1)
• The two screws [C] are shorter than the other screws installed in the inner two screw holes. Make
sure that the two screws [C] are installed in the outer screw holes on the scanner front cover.
4. Scanner front cover [D] ( x 2)
156
Exterior Covers
5. Operation panel [E]
Paper Exit Cover
1. Front right cover ( p.156)
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
Inner Tray
1. Left cover ( p.154)
157
2. Upper inner cover ( p.153)

3. Paper exit cover ( p.157)
4. Inner tray [A]
158
Scanner -1
Scanner -1
Exposure Glass
1. Glass cover [A] ( x 2)

2. ARDF exposure glass [B]
3. Rear scale [C] ( x 3)
4. Exposure glass with left scale [D]
• Position the black marker [E] at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.
Original Length/Width Sensors
Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012)

1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.159)
159
2. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Lens cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Original width sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
5. Original length sensor bracket [D] ( x 2)
6. Original width and length sensors [E] ( x 1 each)
Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092)

1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.159)
2. Ground plate ( p.165)
160
Scanner -1
3. Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

4. Original length sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 2)
5. Original width and length sensors [C] ( x 1 each)
Exposure Lamp

1. Operation panel with scanner front cover ( p.156)
2. Exposure glass ( p.159)
3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame.
161
4. Scanner left stays [C] ( x 2)

5. Scanner front frame [D] ( x 5)
6. Disconnect the connector [E] ( x 1).

7. Remove the clamp [F] ( x 1)
8. Remove the pulley [G].
9. Release the cable clamp [H].
10. Hold down the snap [I], and then slide the exposure lamp [J] to the front side.
11. Exposure lamp [J]
162
Scanner -1

1. Operation panel with scanner front cover ( p.156)
3. Rear cover ( p.154)
4. Scanner rear frame ( p.163)
5. Disconnect the exposure lamp cable from the lamp stabilizer ( x 1, x 2).
6. Do steps 7 to 11 in the "Color Scanner Model" described above.
Scanner Motor
4

2. Scanner left cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Scanner top rear cover [B] ( x 1)
163
4
4. Scanner rear frame [C] ( x 8, x 3, x 2)
5. Scanner motor bracket [D] ( x 1)

6. Scanner motor [E] ( x 2, spring x 1)
• After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual
( p.257).
164
Scanner -1
Sensor Board Unit (SBU)

2. Original length sensor bracket ( p.159)
3. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, flat cable x 1)

165
2. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)

3. SBU cover bracket [B] ( x 4)
4. Ground plate [C] ( x 4)
5. Sensor board unit [D] ( x 4, x 3, x 1)
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
• SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): ( p.257)
• SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.): ( p.257)
• SP4–011 (Main Scan Reg): ( p.257)
• SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the
DF and Platen mode is different.
Lamp Stabilizer

166
Scanner -1
3. Lamp stabilizer unit [A] ( x 2, x 2)

4. Lamp stabilizer (CS model: x 4, MS model: stud x 2)
SIO (Scanner In/Out) Board

3. SIO board with bracket [A] ( x 4, All s)
167
Scanner HP Sensor

2. Scanner left cover and Scanner top rear cover ( p.163)
4. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side.
5. Remove the mylar [B]

6. Remove the scanner HP sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1, two snaps)
Platen Cover Sensor

2. Scanner left cover and scanner top rear cover ( p.163)
168
Scanner -1
3. Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4
169
Scanner-2
Front Scanner Wire
1. Operation panel with the scanner front cover ( p.156)

2. Front frame ( p.161)
3. Slide the first scanner to the right to make reassembly easy.
4. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

5. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1)
6. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
170
Scanner-2
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C] through
the notch.
3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine's front) five times. Wind the left end
clockwise twice.
• The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire to the pulley with
tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.
171
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [E].
• Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Insert the left end into the slit [F]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and the
rear track of the movable pulley [H].
6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [I]. The end should go via the front track of the
right pulley [J] and the front track of the movable pulley [K].
• Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.
172
Scanner-2
7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

8. Insert a scanner-positioning pin [L] through the 2nd carriage hole [M] and the left holes [N] in the
front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [O] through the 1st carriage hole [P] and the right
holes in the front rail [Q].
9. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [R].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [S].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [T].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
• Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins. Do 4
steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
• After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual
( p.257).
Rear Scanner Wire

3. Scanner motor ( p.163)
4. Rear rail frame [A] ( x 5)
173
5. To make reassembly easy, slide the first scanner to the center.

6. Rear scanner wire clamp [B]
7. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] ( x 1)
8. Scanner motor gear [D] ( x 1)
9. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [E] ( x 1)
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the end with the ball [A] through the right square hole from the front.
174
Scanner-2
3. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.
4. Pass the ball end [A] through the drive pulley notch.
5. Wind the end with the ring [C] clockwise (shown from the machine's front) three times; wind the ball
end [A] clockwise (shown from the machine's front) five times.
• The two red marks [D] should meet when you have done this.
6. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during installation.
7. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
• Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.

8. Install the wire.
4
• The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the
winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror image. Example: At the front
of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the
machine. At the rear of the machine, it must face the rear.
9. Perform steps 8 through 13 in "Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire".
• After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual
( p.257).
Touch Panel Position Adjustment
• It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:

• When you replace the operation panel.
• When you replace the controller board.
• When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press , press "1", "9", "9", "3", press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.
175
2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press "1").
4 3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark when " " shows.

5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker "+" shows exactly where the screen
is touched.
6. Press Cancel. Then start from Step 2 again if the "+" mark does not show where the screen is touched.
7. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
8. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration settings.
176
Laser Unit
Laser Unit
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in
this section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
Caution Decal Locations
Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for removal
instructions.)
177
Laser Unit

2. Front door [A] (pins x 2)
3. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Glass cap [C]
5. Shield glass [D]
6. Lower inner cover [E] ( x 2)
178
Laser Unit
7. Laser unit connectors [E] ( x 3, x 1)
• Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board [F] unless the LD unit has to be replaced. This
board is precisely adjusted in the factory.
8. Laser unit [G] ( x 2)
• When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the laser unit.
Polygon Mirror Motor
1. Laser unit ( p.178)

2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
4. After replacing the polygon mirror motor, do the image adjustment ( p.253).
Laser Synchronization Detector
179
4
2. Laser synchronization detector [A] ( x1, x1)
LD Unit
2. Upper spring plate [A] ( x 1)

3. Lower spring plate [B] ( x 1)
4. LD unit [C] ( x 1, x1, spring x 1)
• To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors. Hold the
laser unit casing.
180
Laser Unit
5. After replacing the LD board, do the "Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment" (described in the following section).
Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment because you need to adjust the
adjustor screw [D] on the LD unit with a screwdriver.
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1. Install a (new) LD unit [A] with the left side of the LD unit being lower than the right side. (This makes
this adjustment easier.)
2. Print the test pattern "Hounds Tooth Check (2-Dot Horizontal)" (No. 16 in SP2109-001).
3. Check if the vertical stripes appear on the second pattern (counted from the leading edge) of the
printout.
• Correct: No vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
• Wrong: Vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
4. Turn the adjustor screw [B] by 90 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise).
• If the image of the printout is getting worse, try reverse rotation (clockwise counterclockwise)
5. Print the test pattern and check it out.
6. Try steps 2 to 4 again until you get an image with no vertical stripes.
7. Reassemble the machine after completing this adjustment.
181
Correct: No vertical stripes appear
Incorrect: Vertical stripes appear
182
PCDU
PCDU
PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit)

3. Release the lock lever [B].
4. Pull out the PCDU [C] and place it on a clean flat surface.
5. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
• Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic
development roller.
Reinstallation
Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine.
Drum
1. Remove the PCDU ( p.183)
183
4
2. Toner cap [A]
3. Insert cap [A] into the opening of the PCDU [B].
• Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the opening.
4. Remove the spring [C] on the rear side of the PCDU.

5. Remove the spring [D] on the front side of the PCDU and attach it to the hooks as shown.
• To prevent breaking the weaker hook , use a pair of needle-nose pliers to disconnect the
spring at , remove the spring, then re-attach to and .
• When you move this spring, this retracts the movable drum cleaning blade so that it does not
touch the surface of the drum when the drum is re-installed.
184
PCDU
6. Open the PDCU [E] ( x 2).

4
7. Bracket [F] ( x 1)
185
8. Pull the drum [G] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while releasing the charge roller
[H] using the release levers [I], and then remove the drum .
• Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
Re-installation
1. Replace the drum and close the PCDU ( x 2).
2. Put the opening cap [A in the previous procedure] back in its original place.
3. Detach the spring [A] from , and re-attach it to , .
• You must re-attach the spring to , for the cleaning blade to operate correctly. If you fail to
re-attach the spring to and , the movable cleaning blade will not contact the drum for
cleaning, but the machine will operate without generating an error. However, copies will
gradually become dirty due to toner collecting on the drum.
4. Re-attach the spring on the rear side of the PCDU.
5. After replacing the drum, do these SPs:
• SP 2001: Drum charge roller voltage – make sure that this is at the default setting
• SP 3001-2: ID sensor initial setting
• SP 2805: Process initial setting
• SP 2810-1: Grayscale Setting
186
PCDU
Pick-off Pawls
1. Drum ( p.183)
2. Pawl assembly [A]

3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment

If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted using either
method:
• Changing the spur position
• Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
• After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the
, position. ( p.183)
Charge Roller and Cleaning Roller
1. Drum ( p.183)
187
4
2. Push the charge roller holder [A] toward the front of the drum unit ( x 2) and remove the spring [B].
3. Charge roller [C].
• Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove it. Try to avoid touching the charge roller.
4. Cleaning roller [D]
• Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove it.

5. After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001-001. If it is not at
the standard value (1500), set SP2001-001 to "1500".
• If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will
be too high.
• After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached
to the , position. ( p.183)
Drum Cleaning Blade 1
1. Drum ( p.183)
2. Charge roller and cleaning roller ( p.187)
188
PCDU
4
3. Remove drum cleaning blade 1 [A] ( x 2)
Re-installation
Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade 1 and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade 1 before re-
installing this blade.
• After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the
, position. ( p.183)
ID Sensor

2. Paper exit cover ( p.157)
3. Inner tray ( p.157)
4. Exhaust duct ( p.241)
5. PCDU ( p.183)
6. Fusing unit ( p.207)
189
7. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

8. ID sensor [B] ( x 1)
• Do SP3-001-002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing.
190
Development
Development
Development Filter
1. PCDU ( p.183)
2. Open the PCDU. ( p.183)
3. Upper development cover [A] ( x2)

4. Development filter [B]
Development Roller
1. PCDU ( p.183)
3. Upper development cover ( p.191)
191
4
4. Development roller [A]
• Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
Cleaning Procedure
1. PCDU ( p.183
2. Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above.
192
Development
4
3. Remove the upper development cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Fold up a sheet of copy paper [A] to fit the width of the uncovered area of the development roller, as
shown below.
5. Slide the paper [A] along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface.
193
4
6. Rotate the development roller [A] in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned is no longer
visible.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have cleaned the entire surface of the roller.
8. Reassemble the PCDU and install the PCDU into the machine.
Developer
1. PCDU ( p.183)
3. Development roller ( p.191)
4. Joint bracket [A] ( x 2)

5. Development unit [B]
194
Development
6. Tip out the old developer [C].

7. Turn drive gear [D] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the developer roller.
4
• Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations. Work carefully to avoid
scratching or nicking the development roller.
8. Clean the development roller with a dry cloth.
9. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [E] evenly along the length of the development unit.
10. Rotate the drive gear [F] to work the developer into the unit.
11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
12. Re-install the development roller.
• Make sure that the seals at the both sides of the development roller are set inside the case after
you re-install the development roller.
195
4
13. Place a piece of paper [G] over the toner entrance hole. This prevents used toner falling from the drum
unit into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref setting
(toner density reference voltage)
14. Secure the drum unit [H] to the development unit, to close the PCDU ( x 2).
15. Install the PCDU in the machine and close the front and right doors.
16. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warm up.
17. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number.
18. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet of paper from the PCDU.
TD Sensor
1. PCDU ( p.183)
2. Empty all developer from the development unit. ( p.194)
196
Development
4
3. Seal
4. TD sensor [A] ( x1)
• The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape [B]. Pry it off with the flat head
of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor.
5. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2-801.
• When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of
paper.
197
Transfer
Transfer Belt Unit
• To avoid exposing the drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a
long period.

2. Release the lever [B].
3. Transfer belt unit [C]
• Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
Transfer Belt
1. Transfer belt unit ( p.198)
198
Transfer
4
2. Connector [A] ( x 1)
3. Remove the springs (front and rear) [B].

4. Release the hooks (front and rear) [C].
5. Transfer belt with rollers [D]
199
6. Lay the transfer belt with rollers on a flat clean surface, and fold the unit [E] to release the tension on
the belt ( x 2).
7. Transfer belt [F]
• Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.

• Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent the
belt from slipping.
• When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [F].
• To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers and make sure
that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the rollers.
200
Transfer
Toner Overflow Sensor
2. Toner overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade

2. Transfer belt ( p.198)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
• Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or damage.
201
Paper Feed
Paper Feed Unit
Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Right rear cover ( p.155)
3. Duplex unit ( p.223)
4 4. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
5. Paper guide plate [A] (hook x 2)

6. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
Pick-Up, Feed and Separation Rollers
Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Paper feed unit ( p.202)
202
Paper Feed
4
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1)
Tray Lift Motor
203
2. Tray lift motor 1 or 2 [A] ( x 2, x 3)
Relay, Tray Lift, Paper End and Paper Feed Sensors
Tray 1 and Tray 2

4. Paper feed unit ( p.202)
4
5. Tray lift sensor [A] ( x 1)

6. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each)
7. Relay sensor bracket [D] ( x 1)
8. Relay sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
9. Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1)
10. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook)
Registration Sensor

204
Paper Feed

4. Paper feed unit for tray 1 ( p.202)
5. Paper Trays 1 and 2
6. Paper dust box [A]
7. Pull out the paper dust container [B].

8. Remove two screws [C].
• This makes the paper guide [D] tilt a little bit. Now you can access the screw [E].
205
9. Dust container rail [F] ( [E] x 1)

10. Sensor bracket [G] ( x 1)
• You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside (paper tray location) of the
machine.
11. Registration sensor [H] ( x 1, hooks)
Reinstall the registration sensor

It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame. First attach the sensor bracket with tape
temporarily.
4
206
Fusing
Fusing
Fusing Unit
• Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.

4
3. Pull up the lock levers [A].

4. Pull the fusing unit [B] until you hear a click.
• The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from falling down.
5. Pull up the lock levers [A] again, and then remove the fusing unit [B].
Web Roller Unit
207
4
2. Web roller unit [A] ( x 2)
Brake Pad
1. Web roller unit ( p.207)
2. Web left cover [A] (front: x 2, rear: stepped screw x 2)

3. Web top frame [B] ( x 2)
208
Fusing
4
4. Web left frame [C] ( x 2)
5. Brake pad [D]
Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers

2. Web left cover ( p.208)
3. Web top frame ( p.208)
4. Web left frame ( p.208)
5. Front gear bracket [A] ( x 2)

6. All gears and bushings (rear side) [B] ( x 2)
209
4
7. Rear gear bracket [C] ( x 2)
8. All gear and bushings (rear side) [D] ( x 2, spring x 1)
9. Front bracket [E] ( x 2)
10. Web holder roller [F] (holder x 2, spring x 2)

11. Web take up roller [G] ( )
12. Web supply roller [H] ( )
210
Fusing
Installing a new web holder roller
The holder [A] has a one-way clutch. Make sure that the holder [A] is set at the front side.
Installing new web rollers
1. Install the web supply roller [A] first ( ). Make sure that the web sheet is under the pin [B].
2. Install the web take up roller [C] ( ). Make sure that the printed number [D] is outside the web
take up roller.
3. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.209).
4. Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings ( p.209).
211
5. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.209).
4
6. Turn the rear gear [E] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
7. Reinstall the front gear bracket [F] ( p.209).
8. Turn the coupling [G] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
9. Reinstall the web unit.
10. If you install a new cleaning web, reset SP 7806-008 (press "Execute" on the LCD).
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller
2. Fusing exit guide [A] (lock x 2)

3. Fusing front upper cover [B] ( x 3)
212
Fusing
4. Fusing rear upper cover [C] ( x 3)

5. Fusing outer guide [D] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
6. Cleaning roller unit [E] ( x 4)

7. Pressure roller cleaning roller [F] (spring x 2, holder x 2)
Thermostat

213
3. Fusing top cover [A] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)

4. Thermostat holder [B] ( x 2)
5. Thermostat cover [C] ( x 2)
6. Thermostat [D] (terminal x 2)
Thermistor

3. Fusing top cover ( p.213)
214
Fusing
4. Pull the two tabs [A].

5. Disconnect the two terminals [B].
6. Sensor stays [C] ( x 1 each)
7. Thermistors [D] ( x 2, x 1)
Hot Roller Strippers

215
4. Fusing top frame [A] ( x 5)
• The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Be careful not to damage
the cords when removing the hot roller stripper [B].
5. Hot roller stripper [B] (spring x 1)
Fusing Lamps

216
Fusing
4. Connector cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Fusing top frame with connector [B] ( x 9)
6. Fusing front lower cover [C] ( x 2)

7. Fusing front frame [D] ( x 3)
8. Fusing rear lower cover [E] ( x 2)
9. Fusing rear frame [F] ( x 5)
217
4
10. Terminal bracket [G] ( x 4)
11. Front holder bracket [H] ( x 1)
12. Terminal base [I] ( x 3)
13. Rear holder bracket [J] ( x 1)
14. Fusing lamp-Center (550W) [K]
15. Fusing lamp-End (750W) [L]
Hot Roller and Pressure Roller
1. Fusing lamps-Center and End ( p.216)
218
Fusing
2. Hot roller [A] (snap ring x 2, gear x 2, bushing x 2)

3. Pressure roller [B] ( x 2, bushing x 2)
219
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Unit

2. Fusing exhaust fan duct ( p.251)
3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 3, x 2)
Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, and Paper Exit Sensors
220
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor

1. Paper exit unit ( p.220)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Paper exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
Paper Overflow Sensor

2. Paper overflow sensor [C] ( x 1, hooks)
Fusing Exit Sensor 4

2. Sensor bracket [D] ( x 2)
3. Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1)
Junction Jam Sensor
2. Paper guide [A] ( x 3)

3. Junction jam sensor [B] ( x 1)
221
Paper Exit Motor
2. Motor cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Paper exit motor [B] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
222
Duplex
Duplex
Duplex Unit

3. Open the lower door [A] at the duplex unit.

4. Release the tab [B] and remove the lower door (spring x 2).
6. Release the front link [C] ( x 1).
223
4 7. Keep the right door fully open.
8. Push up the duplex unit a little bit, while pressing the bracket [D] to lock the spring [E].
• Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire (step 9). Otherwise, the lock for
the spring [E] is released.
224
Duplex
4
9. Wire [F] ( x 1)
10. Push the projection [G].
11. Duplex unit ( x 3, ground cable x 1)
Right Door Cover
1. Open the duplex door [A] and by-pass tray.

2. Right door cover [B] ( x 4)
225
Duplex Door Sensor
1. Right door cover ( p.223)

3. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
Duplex Entrance Sensor

226
Duplex
3. Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2)

4. Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hooks)
Duplex Exit Sensor
227
2. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Remove the shaft [B] ( x 1).

4. Transfer belt unit holder [C] ( x 1, x 1)
• When re-installing the transfer belt unit holder, make sure that the spring [D] correctly hooks onto
the frame.
228
Duplex
5. Guide plate [E] (two hooks)

6. Duplex exit sensor [F] ( x 1, hooks)
Duplex/By-pass Motor
2. Frame [A] ( x 4)
3. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Duplex/By-pass motor [C] ( x 4, bushing x 8, timing belt x 1)
229
Duplex Inverter Motor

3. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Duplex door [B]

5. Duplex guide plate [C] ( x 3)
230
Duplex
6. Bracket [D] ( x 2)
7. Duplex inverter motor [E] ( x 3, x 1)
231
By-pass
By-pass Paper Size Sensor
1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Move the side fences to the center.
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 4)
4. By-pass paper size sensor [C] ( x 1)
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor

1. Adjust the projection [E] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
232
By-pass
2. Install the by-pass paper size sensor so that the hole [D] in this sensor faces the projection [E] of the
left side fence bar.
3. Reassemble the copier.
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-024 (By-pass paper size < Input Check).
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011
B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011

4
A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111
B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111
By-pass Paper End Sensor
2. By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).

3. By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
233
By-pass Pick-up, Feed and Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

2. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.233)
3. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)

4. By-pass feed roller [B] ( x 1)
5. By-pass separation roller [C] ( x 1)
6. Torque limiter [D]
By-pass Feed Clutch

2. Right door rear cover ( p.227)
4. Transfer belt unit holder ( p.227)
234
By-pass
4
5. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2)
6. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
235
Drive Area
Paper Feed Clutch
Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, bushing x 1)

3. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1)
Development Paddle Motor
236
Drive Area
2. Development paddle motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Transfer/Development Motor
2. Transfer/development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
237
Drum Motor
2. Drum motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Fusing Motor
238
Drive Area
2. Fusing motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Web Motor
2. Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Web motor [B] ( x 1, x 1)
239
Paper Feed Motor

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Transfer Belt Contact Motor

3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
240
Drive Area
Registration Motor

3. Registration motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)

4. Registration motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
Toner Supply Motor

2. Upper inner cover ( p.153)
3. Inner Tray ( p.157)
241
4
4. Exhaust duct [A] ( x 2)
5. Toner supply motor [B] (hooks, x 1)
242
Electrical Components
Controller Unit
1. Controller unit [A] ( x 2)
HDD Unit (Standard for D011/D013/D091/D092)
Before replacing the HDD unit

Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
1. Controller unit ( p.243)
243
2. HDD unit [A] ( x 3)
After installing the new HDD unit

1. Do SP5832-001 to format the hard disk.
2. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
3. Do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to which you have
already copied the address book data if possible.
4. Turn the main power switch off/on.
Disposal of HDD Units
• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must
remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically, the
HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically
during copy job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it
cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.
Reinstallation
• Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is
replaced: document server documents, fixed stamps, document server address book
• The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
• If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security or the Data Encryption feature, these applications
must be installed again. For more, see "Installation".
244
• If the customer is using the HDD Encryption Unit, the encryption key must be restored after replacing
the HDD unit. For details, see the installation procedure for the HDD Encryption Unit.
Controller Board
• The battery on the control board can explode if replaced incorrectly.

• Dispose of the old battery in accordance with the instructions.
Before replacing the controller board in the model without HDD

When you replace the controller board in a model without a HDD, address book data can be copied from
4
an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card.
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the flash ROM on the controller board with
SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
2. HDD unit (if it has been installed.) ( p.243)
3. FCU cover [A] ( x 3)

4. Controller left bracket [B] ( x 5)
5. Controller board assembly [C] ( x 4, connector caps)
245
4
6. Interface rails [D] (hooks each)
7. NVRAMs [E]
8. DIMM-RAM (If it is installed.)
9. Controller board [F]
When installing the new controller board

1. Remove the NVRAMs from the old controller board.
2. Install them on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
3. Replace the NVRAMs if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAMs.
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the NVRAMs are correctly installed on the controller board.
• Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new
controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field.
After installing the controller board

1. For a model without a HDD, do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the flash ROM on
the controller board from the SD card to which you have already copied the address book data if
possible.
246
2. For a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed, restoring the encryption key is
required. Refer to "Recovery from a Device Problem" in the installation procedure for "p.123 "HDD
Encryption Unit"".
3. Turn the main power switch off/on.
Mother Board

3. Exhaust fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. Controller box [B] ( x 6, x 2, x 3)
247
5. Mother board [C] ( x 6)
BICU
1. Controller box ( p.247)
2. BICU[[A] ( x 7, x all)
IOB
248
4
2. IOB [A] ( x 6, x all)
When installing a new IOB
• The IOB is identical for the D009/D011/D012/D013. However, the DIP switches are set differently
for each machine. Set the DIP switches on the new IOB board to the same settings as the old board.
1. Set the bit switches on the new IOB to the same settings as the old IOB.
PSU
249
4
2. PSU [A] ( x 4, x all)
3. Three clamps [B] (These clamps will be used for the new PSU.)
High Voltage Power Supply Board

3. High voltage power supply board [A] ( x 3, x all)
250
Fusing Exhaust Fan
2. Fusing exhaust duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

3. Separate the duct (hooks).
4. Fusing exhaust fan [B]
When installing the fusing exhaust fan

Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
Controller Fan
1. Controller box ( p.247)
251
4
2. Fan cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Controller fan [B] ( x 1)
When installing the controller fan

Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
252
Copy Adjustments
Copy Adjustments
Overview
Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:

• Scanner Wire
• Lens Block/SBU Assembly
• Scanner Drive Motor
• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence 4
• Memory All Clear
Printing
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-1, No. 14) to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper type and paper feed station, and adjust it
with following SP modes.
253
SP No. Specification
Tray: Plain SP1-001-1
Tray: Thick 1 SP1-001-2
Tray: Thick 2 SP1-001-3
By-pass: Plain SP1-001-4

0 ±9.0 mm
By-pass: Thick 1 SP1-001-5
By-pass: Thick 2 SP1-001-6
4 Duplex: Plain SP1-001-7
Duplex: Thick 1 SP1-001-8
2. Check side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP modes.
By-pass SP1-002-1
Tray 1 SP1-002-2
Tray 2 SP1-002-3
Tray 3 SP1-002-4 0 ±4.0 mm
Tray 4 SP1-002-5
LCT SP1-002-6
Duplex SP1-002-7
Blank Margin
• If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
254
Copy Adjustments
4
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C] and left edge [D] blank margins, and
adjust them with the following SP modes.
Leading Edge SP2-103-1

3.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Trailing Edge SP2-103-2
Left SP2-103-3
2.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Right SP2-103-4
Duplex: Trailing Edge:

SP2-103-5 1.0 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Plain

SP2-103-6 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Plain

SP2-103-7 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Plain
Duplex: Left: Plain SP2-103-8

0.3 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Plain SP2-103-9

SP2-103-10 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Thick

SP2-103-11 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Thick
255

SP2-103-12 0.4 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left: Thick SP2-103-13

0.1 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Thick SP2-103-14
• L Size: Paper length is 297.1 mm or more.

• M Size: Paper length is 216.1 to 297 mm
• S Size: Paper length is 216 mm or less.
4
Main Scan Magnification
1. Use SP2-109-001 no 5 (Grid Pattern) to print a single dot pattern.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2-102 (Magnification Adjustment Main Scan) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: ±2%.
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or printing
margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each paper tray
station.
Use SP2-109-1 No. 14 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If the
parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure.
256
Copy Adjustments
1. Laser unit [A]

2. Bracket [B] ( x2)
3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with the bracket [B]. Do
not tighten the screws at this time.
5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]
1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the illustration above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat steps
5-1) to 5-3).
Scanning
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side
adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
• Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
257
Registration: Platen Mode
4
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge [A] and side-to-side [B] registration, and adjust them with the following SP
modes if necessary.
Leading Edge SP4-010-1 0 ±2.0 mm
Side-to-side SP4-011-1 0 ±2.5 mm
Magnification
Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Sub Scan Magnification
258
Copy Adjustments
4
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4-008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if necessary.
Specification: ±0.9%.
ADF Image Adjustment
Registration
1. Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.

2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
3. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
259
Side-to-side: 1st side SP6-006-1

0.0 mm ±3 mm
Side-to-side: 2nd side SP6-006-2
Leading Edge SP6-006-3 0.0 mm ±5 mm
Leading Edge: 1st side SP6-006-5 0.0 mm ±3 mm
Leading Edge: 2nd side SP6-006-6 0.0 mm ±2.5 mm
Trailing Erase edge: SP6-006-7 0.0 mm ±10.0 mm
4
Touch Screen Calibration
After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working correctly, follow this
procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
• Do not attempt to use items [2] to [7] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use
only.
1. Press , "1", "9", "9", "3", and then press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press "1").
260
Copy Adjustments
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears exactly where the screen
4
is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings.
261
262
5. Service Tables
Service Program Mode
• Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the
hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to
go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
5
Service Program Mode Operation
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust values.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine
until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is
always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1".
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on.
263
5. Service Tables
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.

• The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Service Program Mode Tables
Please note these general changes in this section:

• Group 8(Data Log 2) is a new group of counters.
• Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been removed.
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
5 Example: [-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in

[range / default / step] the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value
can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value (factory
*
setting) is restored.
MS Monochrome Scanner Model: D009/D012
CS Color Scanner Model: D011/D013/D091/D092
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
C1b 40 cpm: D009/D011
C1c 50 cpm: D012/D013
C1.5b D091
C1.5c D092
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode.
264

SP Tables

• System SP Tables
• Printer SP Tables
• Scanner SP Tables
265
5. Service Tables
Using SP Modes
Test Pattern Printing
• Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine.

1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109 (Printing) or SP4-417 (IPU).
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See the tables below.)
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press "OK". This selects the test pattern for printing.
4. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for the test print (paper
size, etc.)
5 5. Press Start twice. (Ignore the "Place Original" messages) to start the test print.
6. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Test Pattern Table (SP2-109-001: Printing test pattern)

No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2-dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
3 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1-dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
266
Using SP Modes
Test Pattern Table: SP4-417-001 IPU Test Patterns

No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 Scanned image 13 Grid pattern CMYK
1 Gradation main scan A 14 Color patch CMYK
2 Gradation main scan B 15 Gray pattern (1)
3 Gradation main scan C 16 Gray pattern (2)
4 Gradation main scan D 17 Gray Pattern (3)
5 Gradation sub scan (1) 18 Shading pattern
6 Grid pattern 19 Thin line pattern
7 Slant grid pattern 20 Scanned + Grid pattern

5
8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned + Gray scale
9 UCR pattern 22 Scanned + Color patch
10 Color patch 16 (1) 23 Scanned + Slant Grid C
11 Color patch 16 (2) 24 Scanned + Slant Grid D
12 Color patch 64
SMC Print Out Lists: SP5-990
1. Open SP mode 5-990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 UP Mode Data List
4 Logging Data List
5 Self-Diagnostics Results List
6 Non-Default
7 NIB Summary
267
5. Service Tables
8 NetFile Log
21 Copy UP Mode List
22 Scanner SP Mode List
23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Press "Execute" on the touch panel.

3. Select "Single Face" or "Both Face".
4. After printing the list, press "Close" to return to the SP mode display.
5. Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return to copy mode.
Nip Band Width Adjustment: SP1-109

5
When paper wrinkling or image offset occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller can be adjusted by
changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the nip bandwidth can also be checked with
SP1-109.
1. Execute SP5-802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets.
2. Open SP1-109-1, press , and then press Yes to confirm the selection.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5" x 11" LEF) on the by-pass feed tray.
5. Press Start twice. The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds, then it exits
automatically.
6. Check the nip bandwidth [A].
268
Using SP Modes
• Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the OHP.

Nip band Specification: 7.0 ± 0.5 mm
Memory Clear: SP5-801
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the
following:
Electrical total counter value
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
5
1. Execute SP5-990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP mode 5-801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select determines which
application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all modules or select the
appropriate number from the table below.
5801-001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy

002 Engine Clear
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control

003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and
ROM update information.
Initializes the image file system.

004 IMH Memory Clear
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored

005 MCS documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax application
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
269
5. Service Tables
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the

008 Printer application
printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner
009 Scanner application
SP modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and

Web Service/Network thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
010
application Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using
a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP

addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
011 NCS WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
5 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
012 R-FAX
job history, and local storage file numbers.
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

015 Clear UCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

017 CCS
Service) settings.
018 SRM Clear Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
020 Web Uapli
021 ECS
4. Press Execute, and then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
• Do the laser beam pitch adjustment ( p.180).
• Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments ( p.253/ p.257).
• Do the touch screen calibration ( p.260).
• Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed from their factory
settings.
270
Using SP Modes
• Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting).

6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
Software Reset
The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up. Use the following procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once release both
buttons. After "Now loading. Please wait" is displayed for a few seconds the copy window will open. The
machine is ready for normal operation.
System Settings and Copy Setting Reset 5

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
• You must press first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
271
5. Service Tables
Copier Setting Reset
The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
• You must press first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings,
press "Yes".
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press "Exit".
272
Updating the Firmware

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto
an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the controller box.
Before You Begin
An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot
with the power on.
• Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high humidity, or
exposure to direct sunlight.
5
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get exposed
to shock or vibration.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to
it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
• "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send data from
the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or,
press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel. For example, when "Exit
(0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the "0" button on the
operation panel of the copier.
• Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while
the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure.
Updating Firmware
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D009" folder onto the card.
273
5. Service Tables
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.
1. Stop all SDK applications if the VM card is installed ( p.123 "HDD Encryption Unit").
2. Turn the main power switch off.
3. Remove the slot cover ( x 1).
4. Remove the VM card from SD Card Slot 2 if it is installed.
5. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2. Make sure the label on the SD card faces the rear side of the
machine.
6. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD card
locks in place.
5 • To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot.
7. Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
8. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen appears
on the LCD in English.
9. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to
select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently installed.
ROM:
The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
NEW:
line is the module number, the second line the version name.
• Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is
recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
10. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.
• While downloading is in progress, the LCD will display "Loading". When downloading has been
completed, the panel will display "update done".
• For operation panel software, the Start key lights red while downloading is in progress, and then
lights green again after downloading is completed.
274
11. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The
message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
12. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
13. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
14. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
15. Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24"
displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update Errors" in
this section)
Firmware Update Error

5
If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the
module selected for update was not on the SD card.
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating,
then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct
operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
275
5. Service Tables
Handling Firmware Update Errors
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code consists of
the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a

20 Cannot map logical address
different SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
Cannot decompress compressed

5 22
data
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is damaged.
Error occurred when ROM update Controller program defective. If the second attempt fails,
23
program started replace controller board.
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly, or use a

24 SD card access error
different SD card.
No HDD available for stamp data

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for
31
download the download, the re-start the procedure.
Data incorrect after download Execute the recovery procedure for the intended module
32
interrupted download, then repeat the installation procedure.
33 Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
34
module is not on the SD card) (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

Module mismatch – Module on
35 for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
SD card is not for this machine
install again.

Cannot write module – Cause
other than E34, E35
install again.
276
Code Meaning Solution
Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

40 Engine module download failed
and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace controller board.

Electronic confirmation check
failed
install again.
5
277
5. Service Tables
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
Uploading NVRAM Data (SP5-824)

2. Remove the SD card cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2.
4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Execute SP5-824.
6. Press "1" to start uploading the NVRAM data.
5
Downloading NVRAM Data (SP5-825)
The following data are not downloaded from the SD card:

• Total counter
• C/O, P/O Counter
• Dupelx, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning counters (system settings).
• Engine SP data
1. Stop all SDK applications if the VM card is installed ( p.123 "HDD Encryption Unit").
3. Remove the SD card cover [A].
4. Remove the VM card from SD card slot 2 if it is installed.
5. Plug the SD card [B] into SD card slot 2.
6. Turn on the main switch.
7. Execute SP5-825.
8. Press "1" to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Note that the following errors could occur during downloading:
• If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot proceed,
you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing "1".
• If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press "1" a message
will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the card is abnormal and the execution will
halt.
278
SD Card Appli Move
SD Card Appli Move

Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. However you can move application programs
from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
If PostScript3 is not to be installed, the printer/scanner card in slot 1 has enough space for the other
applications. Use the printer/scanner card as a destination card.
But if PostScript3 is to be installed, use the PostScript3 card as a destination card because moving the data
from the PostScript3 card is not licensed from the maker of this software.
5
Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to
another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application
program from one card to another card.
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
3. Return the SD card to a customer for safekeeping place after you copy the application program from
one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
• The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
• You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other data to the same SD
card that stores PostScript data.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.
If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade or application merge.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied into this SD card.
279
5. Service Tables
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 2. The application program
is copied from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
5
The menu "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the
original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs
by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.
If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware
upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 1. The application program
is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
• This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
280
Self-Diagnostic Mode
Self-Diagnostic Mode at Power On
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the copy engine
to take effect and then starts an independent self-diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows
the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is
displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition.
281
5. Service Tables
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
282
Detailed Self-Diagnostic Mode
In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is powered on, you can set the
machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually in order to test other components or conditions that
are not tested during self-diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode.
No. Name
G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis
Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.

1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I/F port. 5
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at the same time, switch
on the machine.
You will see "Now Loading" on the touch-panel, and then you will see the results of the test.
A report is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test is executed, whether errors were detected
or not.
283
5. Service Tables
Using the Debug Log

Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve
error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information is lost
when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up the machine
5 so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
Switching On And Setting Up Save Debug Log
The debug information cannot be saved the until the "Save Debug Log" function has been switched on and
a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", press "1".
3. On the control panel keypad, press "1" then press . This switches the Save Debug Log feature on.
• The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information
to be saved.
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save
Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the
target destination, then press .
284
Using the Debug Log
• Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the
service slot.
5. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858 (Debug
Save When) provides the following items for selection.
5
1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine-related SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code is

2 Controller SC Error
generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering
3 Any SC Error
code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
• More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows "Engine SC Error"
selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
285
5. Service Tables
Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys, then
press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
• For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "4. Troubleshooting"
5 6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch
"5859".
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
• Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate
the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
286
Using the Debug Log
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848(COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
5
• The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
System Resource
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box

NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the target selected
with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858and the memory modules selected with
SP5-859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and Web
memory modules.
287
5. Service Tables
• The initial settings are all zero.

• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings, especially the
settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit numbers
from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006to010. For example, if you
want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for
the "PRINTER" column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB.
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD

1. Insert the SD card into service slot of the copier.
5 2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write the
debugging data to the SD card.
• The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB, you can
switch to another SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email,
or just send the SD card by mail.
Recording Errors Manually

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other errors that occur
while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to perform the following immediately
after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
• In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously switched on the Save Debug
Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter "01" then hold down for at least 3 sec. until the machine beeps then
release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service
representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service representatives can retrieve
it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
288
Dip Switches
Dip Switches
I/O Board: DIP SW101
Bit
Location
6 7 8
Japan ON ON OFF
North America OFF ON OFF
Europe ON OFF OFF
China OFF OFF ON

5
Taiwan OFF ON ON
Korea ON OFF ON
Asia ON ON ON
ON: Up, OFF: Down
289
5. Service Tables
290
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call Conditions

For "Service Call Conditions" information, see "Appendices".
291
6. Troubleshooting
Electrical Component Defects

Sensors
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Scanner Home Position Open SC121 is displayed.

318-2 (SIO)
(S1) Shorted SC120 is displayed.
Open APS and ARE do not function properly.

Platen Cover (S2) 318-5 (SIO)
Shorted No symptom.
Open/ CPU cannot detect the original size

313-14
Original Width 1 (S3) properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SIO) Shorted correctly.
6 313-11 Open/ CPU cannot detect the original size

Original Width 2 (S4) properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SIO) Shorted correctly.
Open/ CPU cannot detect the original size

Original Length 1 (S5) 313-8 (SIO) properly. APS and ARE do not function
Shorted correctly.
Open CPU cannot detect the original size

Original Length-2 (S6) 313-5 (SIO) properly. APS and ARE do not function
Shorted correctly.
Open CPU cannot detect the original size

Original Length-3 (S7) 313-2 (SIO) properly. APS and ARE do not function
Shorted correctly.
CPU cannot detect paper even a sheet of

Open
paper remains at the fusing unit.
Fusing Entrance (S8) 208-8 (IOB)
CPU detects paper even a sheet of paper
Shorted
does not remain at the fusing unit.
208-11 Open SC350 is displayed after copying.

ID (Image Density) (S9)
(IOB) Shorted SC351 is displayed after copying.
292
CPU detects the web end even the web is

Open
208-16 not used up.
Web End (S10)
(IOB) CPU cannot detect the web end even the
Shorted
web is used up.
The add toner indicator blinks even if there

213-14 Open
TD (Toner Density) (S11) is toner in the development unit.
(IOB)
Shorted SC390 is displayed.
CPU cannot detect the toner overflow even

Open the waste toner in the transfer belt unit is
217-B15 full.
Toner Overflow (S13)
(IOB) CPU detects the toner overflow even the
Shorted waste toner in the transfer belt unit is not
full.
6
217-A8 Open Jam Z (Jam 26/27)
Duplex Entrance (S14)
(IOB) Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
217-A11 Open "Open Cover" is displayed

Duplex Cover (S15)
(IOB) Shorted "Open cover" cannot be detected.
217-A14 Open Jam Z (Jam 25)

Duplex Exit (S16)
(IOB) Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
The Paper End indicator lights even if

Open
217-B3 paper is placed on the by-pass tray.
By-pass Paper End (S17)
(IOB) The Paper End indicator does not light even
Shorted
if there is no paper on the by-pass tray.
217-B9, Open
By-pass Paper Size (S18) 10,12,13 Paper size error
(IOB) Shorted
No symptom, but this may cause Jam A

216-A4 Open/ (Jam 11) and some pieces of paper are
Paper Feed 1 (S9)
(IOB) Shorted remaining at the paper feed unit when tray
1 is opened.
293
6. Troubleshooting
216-A7 Open Jam A (Jam 3, 11)

Relay 1 (S20)
(IOB) Shorted Jam A, B (Jam 1)
216-A10 The Paper End indicator lights even if

Open
(IOB) paper is placed in the paper tray 1.
Paper End 1 (S21)
The Paper End indicator does not light even
Shorted
if there is no paper in the paper tray 1.
216-A13 Open/
Tray Lift 1 (S22) SC501 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
No symptom, but this may cause Jam A

216-B4 Open/ (Jam 12) and some pieces of paper are
Paper Feed 2 (S23)
(IOB) Shorted remaining at the paper feed unit when tray
2 is opened.
6 216-B7 Open Jam A (Jam 3, 11)
Relay 2 (S24)
(IOB) Shorted Jam A, B (Jam 1)
The Paper End indicator lights even if

Open
216-B10 paper is placed in the paper tray 2.
Paper End 2 (S25)
(IOB) The Paper End indicator does not light even
Shorted
if there is no paper in the paper tray 2.
216-B13 Open/
Tray Lift 2 (S26) SC502 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
Open Jam A (Jam 8, 17)

Registration (S27) 209-2 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B (Jam 1)
209-4,5,6, Open/
Paper Size 1 (S28) Paper size error in tray 1
8 (IOB) Shorted
209-9,10,1 Open/
Paper Size 2 (S29) Paper size error in tray 2
1,13 (IOB) Shorted
294
Lower Paper Height 1 Open/

210-4 (IOB)
(S30) Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 2 on the
Open/ LCD is wrong.
Lower Paper Height 2
210-7 (IOB)
(S31) Shorted
Upper Paper Height 1 210-12 Open/

(S32) (IOB) Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 1 on the
Open/ LCD is wrong.
Upper Paper Height 2 210-15
(S33) (IOB) Shorted
221-A10 Open/
Junction Jam (S34) Jam C (Jam 24/64)
(IOB) Shorted
221-B2 Open Jam C (Jam 20)

Paper Exit (S35)
(IOB) Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
6
Open Jam C (Jam 19)
Fusing Exit 221-B5
Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
Paper overflow message is not displayed

Open
when a paper overflow condition exists.
Paper Overflow 221-B8 Paper overflow message is displayed
Shorted when a paper overflow condition does not
exist.
Switches
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
Main Power 903-1,2 Open The machine does not turn on.
(SW1) (PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.
295
6. Troubleshooting
"Doors/Covers Open" is displayed even if the front

Open
913-1 or right door is closed.
Interlock 1 (SW2)
(PSU) The LCD goes blank when the front or right door is
Shorted
opened.
"Open Cover" is displayed even if the front or right

Open
913-2 door is closed.
Interlock 2 (SW3)
(PSU) The LCD goes blank when the front or right door is
Shorted
opened.
"Open Cover" is displayed even if the right door is

221-B10 Open
Right Door (SW4) closed.
(IOB)
Shorted The LCD goes blank when the right door is opened.
296
Blown Fuse Conditions
Blown Fuse Conditions
• Use a correct rating fuse for the fuse replacement. Never use a wrong rating fuse. If do so, the machine
may be damaged.
Rating
Fuse Symptom at power on
115V 210 to 230V
Power Supply Board
FU21 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V SC 533 (Power to IOB)
FU22 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V SC 144-02 (Power to SIO)
"Open Cover" is displayed.

FU23 10A / 125V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
"Open Cover" is displayed. 6

FU24 10A / 125V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
Alert LED turns on and operation panel does not turn

FU25 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V
on. (Power to MB)
Stack paper in the optional paper feed unit or LCT is

FU26 6.3A / 125V 6.3A / 250V not detected. SC 503 is issued after opening and
closing the tray 3 or 4. (Power to optional PFU or LCT)
The machine does not detect a finisher. (Power to

FU27 6.3A / 250V 6.3 A/ 250V
optional Finisher)
FU101 15A / 125V 8A / 250V No response
FU102 12A / 125V 4A / 250V No response
297
6. Troubleshooting
298
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min.
expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
• Panel off timer (10 sec – 240 min): Panel Off Mode. Default setting: 1minute
• Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode
Default settings: 1 minute
299
7. Energy Saving
Normally, Panel Off timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Panel Off timer, the
machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips the Panel Off.
Example
• Panel off: 1 min.
• Auto Off: 1 min.
• The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Panel Off and Low Power modes are not used.
Return to Stand-by Mode

Off/Sleep Mode
Recovery time.
• Max 10 sec. for D009/D011/D091
• Max 15 sec. for D012/D013/D092
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs
7 could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.
• If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too long.
Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the customer
is not satisfied.
• If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240
minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the machine
for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
• If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained below.
Energy Save Effectiveness
SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
• 8941-001: Operating mode
• 8941-002: Standby mode
• 8941-003: Panel off mode
• 8941-004: Low power mode (not used in this machine)
• 8941-005: Off/sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of
energy that is used by the machine.
300
Energy Save
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are measured
in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual energy
consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Here is an example calculation.
Machine Power SP8941: Start Time: End Time: Time Power

Date Consumpt Machine (min.) (min.) Differences Consumption
ion (W): Status (Data:b - (Data:a x
Data: b Data: c
Data: a Data: c) Data:d)
(min.) (Wmin.)
Data: d Data: e 7
001:
Operating Operatin
mode 1081.8 g Time 21089.0 21386.0 297.0 321294.6
Ready 002:
mode Standby
(stand by) 214.0 Time 306163.0 308046.0 1883.0 402962.0
Energy 003:
mode Energy
(Panel off) 214.0 Save Time 71386.0 75111.0 3725.0 797150.0
005:
Off/Sleep Off mode
mode 7.0 Time 508776.0 520377.0 11601.0 81207.0
Total Time of Data: d (min.) 17506.0
301
7. Energy Saving
Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour) 291.77
Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.) 1602613.60
Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH) 26.71
302
Paper Save
Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function
Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall
is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
7
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
303
7. Energy Saving
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
• For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
• For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.
7
Al-C1/C1.5
• Total counter: SP 8581-001
• Duplex counter: SP 8411-001
• Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004
• Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
single-sided and duplex jobs
Duplex mode:
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Paper Total counter Duplex counter

Originals
used used Saved SP8501-001 SP8411-001
1 1 1 0 1 0
2 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 2 1 3 1
4 4 2 2 4 2
5 5 3 2 5 2
304
Paper Save

Originals
10 10 5 5 10 5
20 20 10 10 20 10
If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously. The
following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex/
combine jobs.
2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 2 2
4 4 2 2 2 2
7
5 5 3 2 3 2
10 10 5 5 5 5
20 20 10 10 10 10
Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 2 2 2
4 4 1 3 2 2
5 5 2 3 3 3
6 6 2 4 3 3
7 7 2 5 4 4
305
7. Energy Saving

Originals
8 8 2 6 4 4
9 9 3 6 5 5
10 10 3 7 5 5
11 11 3 8 6 6
12 12 3 9 6 6
306
Model AL-C1/C1.5
Machine Code:
D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092
Appendices
29 December, 2009
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendix: General Specifications
General Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3
General...........................................................................................................................................................3
Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................................5
Printer Controller.............................................................................................................................................6
Scanner Specifications...................................................................................................................................7
Optional Equipment...........................................................................................................................................9
ARDF................................................................................................................................................................9
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit..............................................................................................................................9
LCT 2000-sheet...........................................................................................................................................10
LCT 1200-sheet...........................................................................................................................................10
1-bin Tray Unit.............................................................................................................................................11
Bridge Unit....................................................................................................................................................11
1000-Sheet Finisher....................................................................................................................................12
3000-Sheet Finisher....................................................................................................................................13
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher......................................................................................................................15
Punch Unit for 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher...............................................................................17
USB Specifications.......................................................................................................................................18
IEEE 802.11a/g, g.....................................................................................................................................18
Bluetooth Specifications..............................................................................................................................19
2. Appendix: PM Tables
PM Tables.........................................................................................................................................................21
Mainframe....................................................................................................................................................21
Options.........................................................................................................................................................25
3. Appendix: Service Call Conditions
Service Call Conditions...................................................................................................................................29
Summary.......................................................................................................................................................29
SC Code Descriptions.................................................................................................................................30
4. Appendix: Service Program Mode Tables
System SP Table-1............................................................................................................................................81
SP1-xxx: Feed..............................................................................................................................................81
System SP Table-2............................................................................................................................................97
SP2-xxx: Drum.............................................................................................................................................97
1
System SP Table-3.........................................................................................................................................111
SP3-xxx: Process.......................................................................................................................................111
System SP Table-4.........................................................................................................................................114
SP4-xxx: Scanner......................................................................................................................................114
System SP Table-5.........................................................................................................................................147
SP5-xxx: Mode..........................................................................................................................................147
System SP Table-6.........................................................................................................................................205
SP6-xxx: Peripherals.................................................................................................................................205
System SP Table-7.........................................................................................................................................217
SP7-xxx: Data Log.....................................................................................................................................217
System SP Table-8.........................................................................................................................................233
SP8-xxx: Data Log 2.................................................................................................................................233
Input Check....................................................................................................................................................271
Copier........................................................................................................................................................271
Options.......................................................................................................................................................276
Output Check.................................................................................................................................................281
Copier........................................................................................................................................................281
1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)....................................................................................................................286
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher.....................................................................................................286
Printer Service Table......................................................................................................................................289
Printer SP Tables........................................................................................................................................289
Scanner Service Table..................................................................................................................................295
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................295
2
General Specifications 1
General
Configuration Desktop
Copy Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Original Sheet/Book
Original Size Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Paper tray,
A3/11" x 17" - A5 LEF
Duplex:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm,

By-pass tray:
A3/11" x 17" - A6 SEF
Paper tray
Copy Paper Size
Width: 182 - 297 mm (7.2" - 11.7")
Non-standard Length: 210 mm - 431.8 mm (8.3" - 17.0")
sizes: By-pass tray
Width: 90 - 305 mm (3.6" – 12.1")
Length: 148 - 457.2 mm (5.8" – 18.1")
Paper tray/
60 - 169 g/m2 (16 - 45 lb.)
Copy Paper Weight Duplex:
By-pass: 52 - 220 g/m2 (16 – 57 lb.)
Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 93,

82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
7R5E:
Reproduction Ratios Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93, 85,
78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Zoom: 25 to 400% in 1% steps
3
D009/D011
40 cpm A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
/D091
Copying Speed
1 D012/D013
/D092
50 cpm, A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF)
D009/D011
4.1 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
/D091
First Copy Time
D012/D013
3.5 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF
/D092
D009/D011
Less than 18.0 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP)
/D091
Warm-up Time
D012/D013
Less than 18.0 s (Basic), 15 s (MFP)
/D092
Continuous Copy 1 to 999 (operation panel entry)
Paper Capacity (without 1,200 sheets

options) (550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray)
4,400 sheets
Paper Capacity (with
options) (550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray, 1200-sheet LCT
and 2000-sheet LCT)
A4, 81/2" x 11" and

500 sheets
Paper Output smaller:
B4 and larger: 250 sheets
North America: 120V/60 Hz, More than 12.5 A
Power Source Europe/Asia: 220 – 240 V/50, 60 Hz, More than 6.8 A
Taiwan 110V/60Hz
Dimensions (w x d x h) Without ADF 670 mm x 677 mm x 760 mm (26.3" x 26.8" x 30.1")
With ADF 670 mm x 677 mm x 910 mm (26.3" x 26.8" x 36.1")
EU Less than 85 kg (187 lb.)

Weight
NA Less than 97 kg (147 lb.)
4
General Specifications
Resolution 600 dpi (Scanning and Printing)
Gradation 256 levels (Scanning and Printing)
Original Archive More than 2,500 A4 pages for document server (ITU-T No. 4 Chart) 1
Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (630 g)
Total Counter Electric counter
Mainframe Only Full System
D009/D011
Noise Emission: 70 dB(A) or less 74 dB(A) or less
/D091
Copying
D012/D013
72 dB(A) or less 76 dB(A) or less
/D092
Mainframe Only Full System
D009/D011
Noise Emission: 45 dB(A) or less 45 dB(A) or less
/D091
StandBy
D012/D013
48 dB(A) or less 48 dB(A) or less
/D092
Power Consumption
D009/D011//D091 D012/D013//D092
NA 770 W NA 777 W
Operating
EU, Asia 812 W EU, Asia 896 W
NA 144 W NA 148 W
Ready Mode
NA 104 W NA 104 W
Panel Off
5
D009/D011//D091 D012/D013//D092
NA 5.5 W NA 5.5 W
1 Sleep Mode
EU, Asia
D009/D011: 5.7 W
EU, Asia
D012/D013: 5.6 W
D091: 5.3 W D092: 5.3 W
Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.44 kW (NA)

Maximum
Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia) Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)
• The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.

• In the above "Panel Off" condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.
Printer Controller
D009/D012/D091: Maximum 40 ppm (A4/LT LEF)

Printing Speed:
D011/D013/D092: Maximum 50 ppm (A4/LT LEF)
PCL6/PCL5e
PostScript 3 (Option)
Printer Languages: RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream - an original Ricoh PDL, For D009/
D011/D012/D013 only)
IPDS
RPCS 200/600 dpi For D009/D011/D012/D013 only
PS3 300/600 dpi
Resolution (Driver): PCL5e 300/600 dpi
PCL6 600 dpi
IPDS 300/600 dpi
PCL 45 fonts, International 13 fonts

Resident Fonts:
PS3 Option fonts PS3
6
General Specifications
Ethernet;
Std. (RJ-45 network port: 10Base-T/100Base-TX),
Connectivity USB 2.0
IEEE802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth, IEEE1284

1
Option
(Centronics Parallel), Gigabit Ethernet
Network Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Maximum
MS model: 512 MB (Resident 256 MB + Additional 256 MB)
RAM: CS model: 768 MB (Resident 512 MB + Additional 256 MB)
Note: Additional 256 MB is required for all printer/scanner unit and printer
units.
Scanner Specifications
Standard Scanner Resolution: Main scan/Sub scan 600 dpi
B/W Scanning;
61 ipm, E-mail/Scan-to-Folder/Network Delivery Scanner (A4 LEF,
Text 200 dpi, MH Compression)
Scanning Speed
Color Scanning;
31 ipm, E-mail/Scan-to-Folder/Network Delivery Scanner (A4 LEF,
Text/Photo 200 dpi, Default Compression)
100 to 1200 dpi; When used as a Network TWAIN scanner.

Available scanning Resolution When used as a network delivery scanner,
Range: 100, 200, 300, 400,
Scan-to-Folder, Scan-to-Email, or Document
600 dpi;
Server storage.
Grayscales: 8 bits/pixel
Interface: Ethernet 10/100BASE TX, Wireless LAN 802.11a/g, g
MH, MR, MMR (Binary Picture Processing)

Compression Method: JPEG (Grayscale Processing)
PDF (High Compression Processing): CS model only
7
MS model: 35 MB (A4/ Grayscale/ 600dpi)

Video Memory Capacity:
CS model: 109 MB (A4/ Full color/ 600dpi)
1 Image Storage Capacity:

Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages
Maximum of files: 3000 files
Max. Storage on Doc. Svr. 9,000 pages (B&W (ITUT No. 1/200 dpi MMR)
8
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
ARDF 1
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Table Capacity: 100 sheets (81.4 g/m2, 22 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Copy - 32 to 200 %
Supported Magnification Ratios: Color 32.6 to 200 %

Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: Less than 60W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 mm x 520 mm x 135 mm (22.4"x20.5"x5.3")
Weight: Less than 12kg (26.5 lb.)
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 550 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 169 g/m2 (16 to 45 lb.)
9
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
1 Power Consumption: Less than 50 W (Max.)/ Less than 35 W (Ave,)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.)
LCT 2000-sheet
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 169 g/m2, 16 lb. to 45 lb.
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

Remaining Paper Detection:
4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
LCT 1200-sheet
Paper Size: A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 169 g/m2, 16 lb to 45 lb
Tray Capacity: 1200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 30%, 10%, End)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max)/ 25 W (Ave.)
10
Optional Equipment
Size (W x D x H): 348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm (13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
1-bin Tray Unit 1

Standard Size:
Paper Size:
A3 /DLT to A6/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight: 60 to 169 g/m2, 16 to 45 lb.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 1 W
Weight: 2 kg
Size (W x D x H): 465 mm x 440 mm x 219 mm (18.3"x17.3"x8.6")
Bridge Unit
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 253 g/m2, 16 lb. to 78 lb.
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4")
Weight 5 kg (11 lb.)
11
1000-Sheet Finisher
1 Upper Tray
A3 to A6
Paper Size:
11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5"
Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb.)
250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller)

Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller)
30 sheets (B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger)
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb)

Paper Weight:
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb)
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)

Stapler Capacity:
50 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, LT)
12
Optional Equipment
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m2, 20 lb., number of sets) 1
Set Size 10 to 50
Paper Capacity: 2 to 9
Size 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4/LT LEF
100 100 to 20 100 to 20
B5 LEF
A4/LT SEF 100 50 to 10 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 50 to 10 -
1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)

Staple positions:
2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")
3000-Sheet Finisher
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h) 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.1" x 37.8")
Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
13
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
1 Proof Tray
Paper Size
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2 (14 lb. - 43 lb.)
3,000 sheets A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x 17" SEF,

1,500 sheets 8.5" x 14" SEF, 8.5" x 11" SEF,
Stack Capacity 12" x 18" SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF

Shift Tray
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
100 sheets
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17" SEF, 12"

Paper Size
x 18" SEF
Staples
B5 - A3
Paper Size
8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Same Paper Size
30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
Stapling
Capacity A4 LEF + A3 SEF,
Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
8.5" x11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
14
Optional Equipment
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
20 - 50 pages 150 - 60 sets

A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 19 pages 150 sets 1
Stapled Stack Capacity (same
15 - 50 pages 100 - 30 sets
size) A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" SEF
2 - 14 pages 100 sets
15 - 30 pages 100 - 33 sets

Others
2 - 14 pages 100 sets
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4

Stapled Stack Capacity (mixed
SEF, 8.5" x11" LEF & 11" x 17" 2 - 30 pages 50 set
sizes)
SEF
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher
Finisher
Dimension W x D x H 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.1 x 37.8")
Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
Proof Tray A5 - A3 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 LEF

Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12"x18" SEF
15
2,000
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5

1 1,000
11" x 17" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,
Stack Capacity sheets
8.5" x 11" SEF, 12"x18" SEF
Shift Tray 500 sheets A5 LEF
100 sheets A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF

Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Staple
Paper Size B5-A3, 8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Paper Weight 64 g/m2 - 90 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Same Paper Size
30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4 SEF, 8.5"

Staples Capacity Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets
x 11" LEF & 11" x 17" SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF,

Booklet Stapling 15 sheets 8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,
11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
5,000 staples per

Corner staple
cartridge
Staple Replenishment
2,000 staples per
Booklet staple
cartridge
16
Optional Equipment
13 - 50 pages
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 12 pages
Same Size A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" SEF

10 - 50 pages 1
2 - 9 pages
Corner Staple
Capacity 10 - 30 pages
Others
2 - 9 pages
A4 LEF + A3 SEF
Mixed Size B5 LEF + B4 SEF 2 - 30 pages
8.5" x 11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
2 - 5 pages
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF
Booklet Staple
8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 11" x 17" SEF 6 - 10 pages
Capacity
12" x 18" SEF
11 - 15 pages
Punch Unit for 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher
NA 2/3 holes switchable
Available Punch Units EU 2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
Punch Waste Replenishment EU 2-holes Up to 14,000 sheets
EU 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2, 14 lb Bond - 43 lb Bond
17
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

NA 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5" , 8.5" x 11"
1 NA 3-holes
SEF A3, B4, 11" x 17"
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

Paper Sizes EU 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11"x17"

EU 4-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

Scandinavia 4-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
USB Specifications
USB connectivity is built into the controller.
Interface USB 2.0
480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed),
Data rates 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
IEEE 802.11a/g, g
802.11a: 5 GHz
Radiofrequency Band 802.11b: 2.4 GHz
802.11g: 2.4 GHz
802.11a: 54 Mbps
Data Transfer Speed 802.11b: 11 Mbps
802.11g: 54 Mbps
18
Optional Equipment
IEEE 802.11 WEP

Security Standards
WPA/ WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) Enterprise Mode
1
Bluetooth Specifications
Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1.1
Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps
Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Port Profile

Profile
(SPP), BIP
10 m (The maximum distance when using outdoors, otherwise

Distance Between Devices
depends on the office environment.)
19
20
PM Tables
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
2
Mainframe
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
EM 160K 320K 800K Note
Scanner/Optics
Reflector C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails C Do not use alcohol.
Exposure Glass C C Cleaner
Toner Shield Glass C C Dry cloth or cleaner
APS Sensor C Dry cloth
Exposure Glass (Sheet

C C Cleaner
through)
Drum (OPC) Area
OPC Drum I R
Charge Roller R
Charge Roller Cleaning Roller R
Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R
Quenching Lamp C C Dry cloth
Pick-off Pawls R
21
Spurs C C Dry cloth
Perform SP3-001-2 after

ID Sensor C C
blower brush cleaning.
2 Cleaning Entrance Seal C

Blower brush.
Replace if required.
Side Seal I
Development Unit
Development Drive Gears C Dry cloth
Development Filter R
Development filter: front R
Development filter: rear R
Developer I R
Entrance Seal I
Side Seal I
Development Roller C Dry cloth
Paper Feed
Registration Roller I C Water
Detach and tap gently on flat

Idle Roller Dust Blade I C surface to empty. Blower
brush.
Registration Roller Dust Blade I C Blower brush.
Feed Rollers I C Water
Pick-up Rollers I C Water
Separation Rollers I C Water
By-pass Feed Roller I C Water
22
PM Tables
By-pass Pick-up Roller I C Water
By-pass Separation Roller I C Water
Paper Feed Guides I C Dry cloth
Relay Rollers I C Water 2

Bottom Plate Pad I C Water
Bottom Plate Pad (By-pass

I C Water
feed)
Registration Sensor I C Blower brush
By-pass Feed Roller Gear I L Silicone Grease G-501
Relay Sensors I C Blower Brush
Paper Feed Sensors I C Blower Brush
Duplex Unit
Inverter Rollers C Water
Transport Rollers C Water
Entrance Sensor C Water
Exit Sensor C Water
Transfer Belt Unit
Dry cloth.
Transfer Belt C R To prevent damage to the

cleaning blade, always
replace these items together.
Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade R
Transfer Belt Rollers C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C Dry cloth
Transfer Entrance Guide C C Dry cloth
23
Used Toner Tank I C Empty the tank
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor I I Blower brush

2 Junction Gate Jam sensor I C Blower brush
Fusing Exit Sensor I I Blower brush
Paper Exit Rollers I I Water
Junction Transport Roller I I Water
Paper Exit Guide I I Water
• Due to their durability and extended service life, the feed rollers, separation rollers, and pick-up rollers
of the mainframe, optional paper trays, and LCT are not replaced at PM.
*1: Lubricate the by-pass feed clutch gear with Silicone Grease G501 every P.M.
Fusing Unit and Paper Exit
Fusing Entrance and Exit

C Water or alcohol
Guide Plates
Hot Roller R
Pressure Roller R
Fusing Thermistors R
Cleaning Roller Bushings L Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2
Hot Roller Strippers R
Paper Exit Guide Ribs C Water or alcohol
Web Supply Roller R
Web Holder Roller R
Brake Pad R
24
PM Tables
Options
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints/ originals.

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
ARDF 2
B802 EM 120K (Originals) Note
ARDF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller R Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt R Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller R Damp cloth; alcohol
Sensors C Blower brush
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
PFU
D351 EM 150K 300K 450K Note
Paper Feed Unit
Relay Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Dry or damp cloth
25
LCT
D352 EM 150K 300K 450K Note
LCT 2000-sheet
Bottom Plate Pad C Dry or damp cloth

2
SR5020
B408 EM 150K 300K 450K Note
1000-Sheet Finisher
Rollers C Water or alcohol.
Discharge Brush C C Dry cloth
Jogger Fences I I Replace if required.
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher
B804/B805 EM Note
Rollers C Water or alcohol.
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Jogger Fences I Replace if required.
Punch Unit
Punch Chads C Discard chads.
26
PM Tables
Bridge Unit
D386 EM Note
Bridge Unit
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth

2
1-Bin Tray Unit
D389 EM Note
1-Bin Tray Unit
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
27
28

Summary
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.

3
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main machine Enter SP mode, use SP 5810,
A cannot be operated until the SC has been reset by a service touch [Execute], and then turn the
representative (see the note below). main power switch off and on.
SCs that disable only the features that use the defective
item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under Turn the operation switch or main
B
normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation switch off and on.
panel only when the defective feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can be operated The SC will not be displayed. Only
C
as usual. the SC history is updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed Turn the operation switch off and
D on the operation panel. These are re-displayed if the error on.
occurs again. Also see below.
When a Level "D" SC code occurs

When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator:
• An error occurred
• The job in progress will be erased
• The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch "Reset" on the screen to reset the
machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch "Reset"
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and that the previous job was
lost and must be started again. After reading the message, the operator touches "Confirm" on the screen.
The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine
off and on.
If the operator touches "Reset"
29
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the machine
reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen.
• Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

• If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service Center.
SC Code Descriptions
3
• If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then test the
machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem. Always do this before
you decide to replace the PCB.
• If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the motor or
sensors.
• When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the SC number.
If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
• The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level "D" SC code. This is done for
Level "D" SC codes only.
30
SC Tables: SC1xx
Exposure lamp error
-001: Shading at AGC

-002: Shading at scanning
• The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the white plate
• Exposure lamp defective

• Lamp stabilizer defective 3
101 D • Exposure lamp connector defective
• Standard white plate dirty
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
• SBU defective
• BICU defective
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate.
(The shading data peak does not reach the specified threshold)
Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition during initialization
or copying.
• SIB (B/W), SIB (Color) or scanner drive motor defective

• Scanner motor defective
120 D • Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected
• Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SIB and HP sensor disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective
• BICU defective
31
Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during initialization
or copying.
• SIB (B/W), SIB (Color) or scanner motor drive board defective

• Scanner motor defective
121 D • Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected
• Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected
3 • Scanner HP sensor defective
• Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected
• Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective
• BICU defective
Black level detection error (Color Scanner model only)
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp.
141 D
• Defective SBU
• BICU defective
White level detection error (Color Scanner model only)
The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control.
• Dirty exposure glass or optics section

142 D
• SBU board defective
• Lamp stabilizer defective
• BICU defective
32
SBU auto adjust error (B/W Scanner model only)
One of the following occurred:

• When the machine was powered on, automatic adjustment of the SBU failed.
• Automatic white density adjustment failed when reading standard white plate.
143 C • Lamp stabilizer defective

• Lamp stabilizer connection loose, disconnected or damaged
• White plate mounting is incorrect or defective
3
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
• SBU, SCNB defective
• BICU defective
• Harness connections
-001: SBU connection error
The SBU connection cannot be detected at • Defective SBU

D
power on or recovery from the energy save • Defective harness
mode. • Defective detection port on the BICU
-002: SBU serial communication error
• Defective SIO, SBU or SCNB

D
The power ON of the SBU is not detected. • Defective harness
• Defective detection port on the BICU
144
-003: GASBU reset error
• Defective SBU
D
The serial communication does not work. • Defective detection circuit on the BICU
• Defective harness
-004: VERSION error
• Defective SBU
D
The serial communication does not work. • Defective detection circuit on the BICU
33
Scanner adjustment error (B/W Scanner model only)
During the SBU adjustment, the machine detects that the white level read from the white
plate or paper is out of range. (SP4015)

145 C
• Dirty white plate
• Incorrect position or width of white plate scanning (SP4015)
• BICU board defective
3 • SBU board defective
BICU error
The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the BICU is detected.

161 D
• Defective BICU
• Defective connection between BICU and SBU
Copy Data Security Unit error
The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security function is set
"ON" with the initial setting.
165 D A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set to "ON" with the
initial setting.
• Incorrect installation of the copy data security board

• Defective copy data security board
SC Tables: SC2xx
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout

202 D The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within 10 sec. after
turning on or changing speed
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout

203 D The polygon mirror motor does not leave the READY status within 3 sec. after the polygon
motor switched off.
34
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal remains HIGH for 200 ms while the LD unit is firing.
204 D • Polygon motor/driver board harness loose or broken

• Polygon motor/driver board defective
• Laser optics unit defective
• BICU defective
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD0

3
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for
two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally
220 D
• The Copy Data Security Unit card not installed
• The Copy Data Security Unit card is installed, but it is not the correct type for the
machine.
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for
two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
221 D
• The Copy Data Security Unit card not installed
• The Copy Data Security Unit card is installed, but it is not the correct type for the
machine.
FGATE ON error
230 D The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The BICU generates the
FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on.)
FGATE OFF error
The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The BICU generates the
FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on.)
231 D
• BICU defective
• BICU, Controller board harness loose or broken
• Controller board defective.
35
LD error
The BICU detected a problem at the LD unit.

240 C
• Worn-out LD
• Disconnected or broken harness of the LD.
SC Tables: SC3xx
3 Charge roller bias leak
A charge roller bias leak signal was detected.

302 D
• Charge roller damaged
• High voltage supply board defective
• PCDU harness defective or disconnected
Charge roller bias correction leak
The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum charge roller
bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller.
304 D
• ID sensor defective
• Worn charge roller
• Charge roller damaged
Development roller bias leak
The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage has been
supplied to the development unit.
320 D • Development bias leak
• Broken harness
• Defective high voltage power supply, voltage supply
• Defective high voltage supply unit
36
Development paddle motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the development puddle motor for 2 seconds
after the drum motor has turned on.
324 D • Overload on the development puddle motor
• Defective development puddle motor
• Defective IOB
3
ID sensor pattern test error
One of the following readings occurred 10 times in the ID sensor output when the ID sensor
pattern was checked:
1) Vsp > 2.5V
2) Vsg < 2.5V
3) Vsp =0V
350 D
4) Vsg = 0V
• ID sensor connector defective

• Poor ID sensor connector connection
• I/O board (IOB) defective
• Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on the drum
ID sensor Vsg test error
When the ID sensor was checked, the ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V while the LED current
value is 0.
• ID sensor defective or dirty

• ID sensor connector defective
351 D
• Poor ID sensor connection
• Scanning system defective
• Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
37
Grayscale measurement error
When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate correctly and
these cases are detected 15 times.
355 C
• ID sensor defective or dirty
• The life of ID sensor or photo conductor
• Shield glass dirty
3 360 D TD sensor (Vt) error 1
The following condition occurs thirty times consecutively during printing. Vt is less than 0.5V
or 4.8V or more
• TD sensor disconnected
• Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
• Defective TD sensor.
372 D TD sensor adjustment error
Vts is less than 1.8V or 4.8V or more during TD sensor initialization.
• Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

• TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
• TD sensor defective
• Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
396 D Drum motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds after the drum
motor turned on.
• Overload on the motor

• Defective drum motor
• Defective IOB
38
SC Tables: SC4xx
Vsg adjustment error
Vsg is more than 4.2V or 3.8V or less when the machine adjusts Vsg value.
400 D
• Dirty or defective ID sensor
• Defective ID sensor shutter
Transfer belt bias error 3

The feed back bias from the transfer belt is more than 4V for 60 msec while the transfer
belt bias is output.
The A/D conversion level is 20 or less for 60 msec.
440 D
The PWM duty is 24% or more for 60 msec.
• Power pack broken

• Disconnected connector
Transfer/Development motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer/development motor for 2 seconds
after the transfer/development motor turned on.
441 D • Overload on the motor
• Defective transfer/development motor
• Defective IOB
Transfer belt contact motor error
The transfer belt HP sensor detects incorrect movement of the transfer belt after the transfer
belt contact motor has turned on.
• Dirty transfer belt HP sensor

442 D
• Defective transfer belt contact motor
• Disconnected connector of the transfer belt HP sensor or motor
• Disconnected cable
• Defective IOB
39
SC Tables: SC5xx
501 B 1st tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If
the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper
height position is detected again. At this time, the tray lift sensor should de-activate within
1.5 sec after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec.,
a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 1. After two attempts to release the error by
3 re-setting the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
• An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive and
caused an overload.
• Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift sensor defective
• Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift motor defective
2nd tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds. If
the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height, the paper
height position is detected again. At this time, the tray lift sensor should de-activate within
1.5 sec. after the paper bottom plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec.,
a message will prompt the user to reset Tray 2. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray,
if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
502 B
• An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive and
caused an overload.
• Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift sensor defective
• Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Tray lift motor defective
503 3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
40
For the paper feed unit:

• SC 503-01 occurs if the lift sensor does not turn on within 10 seconds after the tray
lift motor has turned on.
For the LCT:
• SC 503-01 occurs if the lift sensor does not turn on or turn off within 8 seconds after
the tray lift motor has turned on to lift or lower the tray.

-1 B • Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection 3
• Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
• Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
• Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
• Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
• Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times.

• When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
• When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end fence is not in its
position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops.
• If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to
lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at power on.
-2 B
For the LCT:
• Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
• Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
• Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
504 4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit)
41

• When the tray lift motor turns on, the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds. If
this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
-1 B

3 When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds.
-2 B If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.

505 5th tray lift malfunction (optional LCT)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:

• When the tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go on after the tray lift motor
has turned on to lift the paper tray.
• When the tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go off after the tray lift motor
-1 B has turned on to lower the paper tray.
• When the tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go on after the pick-up roller
solenoid has turned on at power on.
• Tray lift motor defective or disconnected

• Tray lift sensor defective or disconnected
Both tray lift sensor and lower limit sensor are turned on at the same time when the main
power is turned on or the right door is closed.
-2 B • Tray lift motor defective or disconnected

• Tray lift sensor defective or disconnected
• Lowe limit sensor defective or disconnected
42
Fusing exhaust fan motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for10 seconds after turning on the fusing exhaust
fan.
530 D
• Defective fusing exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection
• Defective IOB
• Disconnected harness
Exhaust fan motor error 3

The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the exhaust fan
motor.
531 D
• Defective exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
Cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the
cooling fan motor.
532 D
• Defective cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
Paper exit cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the
paper exit cooling fan motor.
533 D
• Defective paper exit cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
43
Fusing motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 2 seconds after turning on the fusing motor.
540 D • Motor overload

• Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection.
• Defective IOB
3 Fusing thermistor open (center)
The thermistor (center) detects 0°C or less for 5 sec.

541 A
• Fusing thermistor disconnected
• Fusing thermistor connector defective
Fusing temperature warm-up error(center)

• The thermistor (center) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing temperature
542 A for 7.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
• The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach the target temperature for
28 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
• Thermistor warped or broken
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1 second by
the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller.
543 A • Power supply unit defective
• BICU defective
• TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
44
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) over 250°C is detected by the fusing temperature
544 A monitor circuit in the BICU board.

• BICU defective
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 15 seconds without the hot roller
3
545 A rotating.
• Disconnected or defective thermistors (center)

• Defective fusing lamp
Zero cross error
• The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when
turning on the main power.
• The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is
on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
547 D
• The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal detections. This
error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 45.
• Defective fusing lamp relay

• Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
• Unstable power supply
Fusing thermistor open (end)
The thermistor (end) detects 0°C or less for 5 sec.

551 A
• Fusing thermistor (end) disconnected
• Fusing thermistor (end) connector defective
45
Fusing temperature warm-up error (end)

• The thermistor (end) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing temperature for
552 A 7.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
• The temperature of the end thermistor does not reach the target temperature for 31
seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
• Thermistor warped or broken

3
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1 second by the
fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing roller.
553 A • Power supply unit defective
• BICU defective
• TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) over 250°C is detected by the fusing temperature monitor
554 A circuit in the BICU board.

• BICU defective
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
After warm-up, the fusing lamp remains at full power for 15 seconds without the hot roller
555 A rotating.
• Disconnected or defective thermistors (ends)

• Defective fusing lamp
46
Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11
557 C
detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs.
• Noise (High frequency)
Fusing unit jam
The fusing sensor detected a fusing unit paper late jam three times. The paper was late
and the fusing exit sensor could not detect the paper three times. 3
559 A
• Remove the paper that is stopped in the fusing unit.
• Check that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
• If the error persists, replace the fusing unit.
• SC559 does not operate until SP1159 has been set to "1" (ON). This sets the machine to count the
number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing unit. The default setting is "0" (OFF).
• SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit. Once this SC has
been issued, the machine cannot be used until the service technician removes the cause of the jam
and restores it to normal operation.
• The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor after the cause
of the jam has been removed.
SC Tables: SC6xx
Mechanical counter error: BK
This SC is only for NA models.

610 D The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1".
• Disconnected mechanical counter

• Defective mechanical counter
47
Communication error between IOB and ADF
After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs.
620 B • Incorrect installation of ARDF

• ARDF defective
• IOB board defective
• External noise
3 Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox
A break (low) signal is received from the finisher or the mailbox.

621 D
• Disconnected cable
• Defective IOB
• Defective main board in the peripherals
Paper feed unit communication error
While the IOB communicates with a peripheral, an SC code is displayed if one of following
conditions occurs.
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripheral only just
622 D after the main switch is turned on.
• The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
• Defective main control board of the peripheral

• Defective BICU or IOB
• Disconnected peripheral
2nd Paper Bank communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

623 D When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd paper bank is
received.
• Loose connector
48
CSS communication error
630 C A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS.
• Communication line error
MF accounting device error 1
The controller sends data to the accounting device, but the device does not respond. This
632 B
occurs three times.
3
• Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device
After communication is established, the controller receives the brake signal from the
633 B
accounting device.
• Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device
The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates a backup RAM error
634 B has occurred.
• Defective controller of the MF accounting device

• Battery error
The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates the battery voltage
635 B error has occurred.
• Defective controller of the MF accounting device

• Battery error
636 IC Card Error
49
External authentication module error
This SC is generated if the external authentication is enabled and following condition

occurs:
-01 D
• No external authentication module
• SD card error or external authentication module broken
• No DESS module
Version error
3 -02 D The version of the external authentication module is not correct.
• Incorrect module version
Management area error
The management number of the external authentication module exceeds the maximum
-99 D
limit.
• Software error
BICU communication error
The BICU does not respond to the frame transmitted from the controller.
641 D
• Defective controller
• Detective BICU
Communication error of the remote service modem

650
(Embedded RCG-M)
Authentication error
The authentication for the Embedded RCG-M fails at a dial up connection.
-001 B • Incorrect SP settings

• Disconnected telephone line
• Disconnected modem board
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password (SP5816-157).
50
Incorrect modem setting
Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.

-004 B
• Same as -001
Check and set the correct AT command (SP5816-160).
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication line or defective
-005 - connection. 3
• Same as -001
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
Incorrect network setting
Both the NIC and Embedded RCG-M are activated at the same time.
-011 -
• Same as -001
Disable the NIC with SP5985-1.
Modem board error
The modem board does not work properly even though the setting of the modem board
is installed with a dial up connection.
-012 - • Same as -001
1. Install the modem board.
2. Check and reset the modem board setting with SP5816.
3. Replace the modem board.
Incorrect dial up connection
-001: Program parameter error
-002: Program execution error

651 C
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call the center
with a dial up connection.
• Caused by a software bug
51
EEPROM error
Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the
669 D
EEPROM error.
• Caused by noise
Engine startup error
3 The BICU fails to respond with the prescribed time when the machine is turned on.
670 D • Connections between BICU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or
damaged
1. Replace the BICU
2. Replace the controller board
BICU error
671 D The model code from the BICU is not correct when the machine is turned on.
Install the correct BICU for this model.
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
• After the machine is powered on, the communication between the controller and
the operation panel is not established, or communication with controller is
interrupted after a normal startup.
• After startup reset of the operation panel, the attention code or the attention
acknowledge code is not sent from the controller within 15 seconds.
• After the controller issues a command to check the communication line with the
672 D controller at 30-second intervals, the controller fails to respond twice.
• Controller stalled
• Controller board installed incorrectly
• Controller board defective
• Operation panel connector loose or defective
• The controller is not completely shutdown when you turn the main switch off.
Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (ON)".
52
Memory address (PER) command error
The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller for the
prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor.
687 D • Harness Disconnection at BICU
• Controller board loose or broken
• Defective BICU
• Defective Controller Board
3
SC Tables: SC7xx
Original stopper HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original stopper HP sensor does not detect
the home position of the original stopper.
700 D
• Defective original stopper HP sensor
• Defective pick-up motor
• Defective DF drive board
Pick-up roller HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on counterclockwise, the pick-up roller HP sensor does not
detect the home position of the pick-up roller.
701 D
• Defective pick-up roller HP sensor
• Defective pick-up motor
• Defective DF drive board
53
Finisher jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change
within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
721 B
• Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Jogger motor disconnected, defective
• Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
3 • Finisher main board and jogger motor
Stack feed-out motor error
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack feed-out
belt 3000ms after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its home position.
• The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off 200 ms after the stack feed-out belt
has moved from its home position.
723 B The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
• Defective stack feed-out HP sensor

• Overload on the stack feed-out motor
• Defective stack feed-out motor
• Defective main board
• Disconnected or defective harness
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is not detected at
the home position within the prescribed time.
725 B The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Guide plate motor disconnected, defective

• Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
• Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective
54
Shift jogger motor 1 error
The side fence does not retract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor 1
switches on.
• Shift jogger motor 1 disconnected, defective

• Shift jogger motor 1 overloaded due to obstruction
• Shift jogger 1 HP sensor disconnected, defective
3
Shift jogger motor 2 error
The side fence does not retract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor 2
switches on.
• Shift jogger motor 2 disconnected, defective

• Shift jogger motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
• Shift jogger 2 HP sensor disconnected, defective
Shift jogger retraction motor error
The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the retraction motor switches
on.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
728 B
• Shift jogger retraction motor broken
• Shift jogger retraction motor connection loose
• Shift jogger retraction motor overloaded
• Defective shift jogger retraction HP sensor
730 B Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
55
The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed time
after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
• Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected, defective

• Shift tray motor of the upper tray disconnected, defective
• Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction
3 Finisher corner stapler motor error
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher
• Staple movement is not finished after a certain time.
For the 1000-sheet finisher
• The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating.
740 B • The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after the staple unit
moves to its home position.
• The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the staple unit moves
from its home position.
• Staple jam
• Motor overload
• Defective stapler motor
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error
The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time after stapling.
741 B
• Defective stapler rotation motor
• Overload to the stapler rotation motor
• Defective stapler rotation HP sensor
56
Finisher stapler movement motor error
Staple movement is not finished within a certain time.

742 B • Motor overload

• Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
• Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
• Defective stapler home position sensor
• Defective stapler movement motor
3
Booklet stapler motor error 1
For the 2000-sheet booklet finisher
743 B The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time.
• Motor overload
• Loose connection of the front stapler motor
• Defective front stapler motor
Booklet staple motor error 2
For the 2000-sheet booklet finisher
744 B The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time.
• Motor overload
• Loose connection of the rear stapler motor
• Defective rear stapler motor
1000/2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after
the tray raises or lowers.
57
Return roller motor error
This occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor
753 B • Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective

• Motor overloaded
• Home position sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
• Home position defective
3 Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor turned
on.
• Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective

• Punch motor disconnected or defective
• Punch motor overload due to obstruction
Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time.
761 B
• Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
• Folder plate motor disconnected, defective
• Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
Punch movement motor error
The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time.
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective

• Defective motor
58
Paper position sensor slide motor error
The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified time.
764 B
• Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective

• Defective motor
Folding unit bottom fence lift motor 3

The folding unit bottom fence movement is not finished within a certain time.
765 B
• Motor harness loose, broken
• Motor drive obstructed
• Motor defective
Clamp roller retraction motor error
The clamp roller movement is not finished within a certain time.

766 B
• Motor harness loose, broken
• Motor drive obstructed
• Motor defective
Stack junction gate motor error
The stack junction gate motor moves but the stack junction gate is not detected at its position
within a specific time.
• Motor broken
• Motor connection loose
• Motor overloaded
59
Shift motor error
The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after the shift motor
770 B has turned on at power on or during its operation.
• Defective shift motor

• Defective shift motor HP sensor
Bridge unit error

3 The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
791 D
• Defective connector
• Broken harness
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit.
792 B
• Defective connector
• Incorrect installation
SC Tables: SC8xx
Energy save I/O sub-system error
816 D Energy saver sub-system detects an error.
• Defective controller board
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader
attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files from the OS
817 D Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
• OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware

• SD card data defective; use another SD card
60
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the
following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
0x6261 6261 6420 6469 7200 00 -> "bad dir"
0x696e 0x69742064 -> "init died"
0x766d 0x5f706167 -> "vm_pageout: VM is full"

819 C 554C UL (USB error) 3
---- Error in the OS
"init died", "vm_pageout: VM is full", "Cache Error"
• System program defective

• Optional board defective
• Replace controller firmware
• For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read
the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
CTL Self-diagnostics error: CPU

820
D [XXXX]: Detailed error code
61
CPU error
During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There are 47 types
of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of the error. The CPU detects
an error and displays the specific error code with the program address where the
error occurs.
• System firmware problem

3 [0001] to [06FF] 1. Turn the main switch off and on.

[0801] to [4005] 2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3. Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the following
information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support
center.
• SC code
• Detailed error code
• Program address
CPU/Memory Error
• System firmware problem

[0702] • Defective RAM-DIMM
[0709] • Defective controller
[070A]
1. Reinstall the controller system software.
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3. Replace the controller.
Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

821 D
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
ASIC error
The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
• Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller board.
62
Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

821 D
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.

[0B06]
• Defective ASIC
• Defective North Bridge and PCI I/F
Replace the controller board. 3
Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer. If the ASIC
timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed.
[0D05] • System firmware problem
• Defective RAM-DIMM
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
[50A1] The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.
• Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the video bridge
[50A2]
device.
• Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
• For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read
the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
63
822 B Self-diagnostic error: HDD
Check performed only when HDD is installed:

• HDD device busy for over 31 s.
• After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over
[3003] 6 s.
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
3 • Controller board defective
No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs.

[3004]
• HDD defective
Self-diagnostic error: NIB

823 B
MAC address check sum error

[6101]
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
PHY IC loop-back error

[6105]
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
Self-diagnostic error : NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, or NVRAM socket damaged.
824 D • NVRAM defective

• NVRAM backup battery exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
826 D Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM
64
The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second counted by the CPU
[1501] on the controller.
• Defective the RTC device
The RTC device is not detected.
• Defective RTC device

[15FF]
• NVRAM without RTC installed
• Discharged backup battery
3
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM
827 D
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
[0201]
• Loose connection
• Defective SDRAM DIMM
Self-diagnostic error: ROM

828 D
Check sum error 1

[0101] • The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If the
check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM

829 D
65
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
• Loose connection
• Defective SDRAM DIMM
[0301]
Turn the main switch off and on.
3 Replace the SDRAM DIMM.

Replace the controller.
Memory structure data error
The memory structure data error for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM) is detected when
the self-diagnostic is executed.
[0302] • Defective RAM DIMM

• Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
833 C Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI configuration,
[0F30] the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the IPU.
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI configuration,
[0F41] the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
Replace the IPU.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Replace the IPU.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
[50B2] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Replace the IPU.
66
835 C Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
• IEEE1284 connector error

[1102]
• Centronic loopback connector defective
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
• ASIC device error 3

[110C] • IEEE1284 connector error
• Centronic loopback connector defective
Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic test.
• Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly

[1120] • Centronic loopback connector defective
• ASIC device defective
838 B Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator via the I2C
bus.
• Defective clock generator

[2701]
• Defective I2C bus
• Defective I2C port on the CPU
839 C USB NAND Flash ROM error
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9101]
The USB NAND Flash ROM controller is disconnected.

[9110]
• Defective controller baord
67
IEEE 1394 I/F error
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.

851 B
Not supported by this machine
• NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board
Wireless LAN Error 1

3
During machine start-up, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless
853 B
LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card (Bluetooth).
• Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
Wireless LAN Error 2
During machine operation, the machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless
854 B
LAN, but not to the wireless LAN card (Bluetooth).
• Wireless LAN card missing (was removed)
Wireless LAN error 3
An error is detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11a/g, g or Bluetooth).

855 B
• Wireless LAN card defective
• Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
Wireless LAN error 4
An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (Bluetooth).

856 B
• Wireless LAN card defective
• PCI connector (to the mother board) loose
USB I/F Error
The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.

857 B
• Bad USB card connection
Replace the controller board
68
HDD Encryption unit error 1

858 C A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD
encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
[0]
3
Encryption key setting for HDD error:
The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
[1]
• Defective SATA chip on the controller board
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
[2]
• Defective NVRAM on the controller board
Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
[30]
Other error:
[31] A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
• Same as SC991
69
HDD Encryption unit error 2

859 C A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with
the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
• No HDD installed
[8]
3 • Unformatted HDD
• The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
2. Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
[9]
• Power failure during the data encryption
Initialize the HDD.
Data read/write error:
[10] The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
• Same as SC863
HDD startup error at main power on
• HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.

• The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 s.
860 B
• HDD is not initialized
• Label data is corrupted
• Defective HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
70
HDD re-try failure
At power on, the HDD is detected. Power supply to the HDD is interrupted after the system
has entered the energy save mode, but after the HDD has been awakened from the energy
save mode, it does not return to the ready status within 30 sec.
861 D
• Harness between HDD and controller board disconnected, defective
• HDD power connector disconnected
• HDD defective
• Controller board defective 3
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
862 D • Defective HDD
Format the HDD with SP5-832-002.

Replace the HDD.
HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors generated during
operation.
863 D
• HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector information
is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed, these bad sectors will not be
accessed for read/write operation.
HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer does
864 D
not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD.
• HDD defective
71
HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863,
865 D
864.
• HDD defective.
SD card error 1: Confirmation
3 The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the
controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The program on the SD card
contains electronic confirmation license data. If the program does not contain this license
866 B data, or if the result of the check shows that the license data in the program on the SD card
is incorrect, then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed.
• Program missing from the SD card

• Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
SD card error 2: SD card removed
867 D The SD card in the slot is removed while the machine is on.
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
SD card error 3: SC card access
An error occurs while an SD card is used.
868 D • SD card not inserted correctly

• SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
72
Address book data error
The address book data cannot be read from the HDD, SD card or flash ROM on the
controller where it is stored, or the data read from the media is defective.
• Software defective:
Turn the machine off/on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then replace the controller
870 B firmware.
• HDD defective.
More Details
3
• Do SP5846-046 (Initialize All Setting & Addr Book) to reset all address book data.
• Reset the user information with SP5832-006 (HDD Formatting– User Information).
• Replace the HDDs.
HDD mail receive data error
• The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly at power on.
• The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly (can neither read nor
872 B write) while processing incoming email.
• HDD defective
• The machine is turned off while the HDD is being accessed.
Do SP5832-007 to format the mail RX data on the HDD.
HDD mail send data error
An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been turned on, or
873 B power has been turned off while the machine has used the HDD.
1. Do SP5832-008 (Format HDD – Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD
73
Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has been used.
Note: The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362) running from an
874 D SD card.
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2. Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit again. For more, see "Installation".
3. HDD defective
3
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
875 D Note: The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362) running from an
SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Log Data Error

CTL
876 An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine
D
operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-001 • Damaged log data file in the HDD
Log Data Error 2
• HDD encryption unit not installed

-002
1. Ask the customer's administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting with a user
tool.
2. Install the HDD encryption unit.
74
Log Data Error

CTL
876 An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine
D
operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 3
• Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-003
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2. Ask the customer's administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting with a user 3
tool.
Log Data Error 4
-004 • Unusual HDD encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Log Data Error 5
• Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine

-005
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99
-099 • Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
HDD DataOverwriteSecurity SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362) is
installed and activated.
877 B • Defective SD card (D362)

• SD card (D362) not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (D362).
2. Check and reinstall the SD card (D362).
75
TPM system authentication error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).

878 D
• Incorrect updating for the system firmware
• Defective flash ROM on the controller board
File Format Converter (MLB) error

3
880 B A request to get access to the MLB is not answered within the specified time.
• MLB defective, replace the MLB
SC Tables: SC9xx
Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains something that is not a number.
900 D • NVRAM incorrect type

• NVRAM defective
• NVRAM data scrambled
• Unexpected error from external source
Printer error 1
An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.

920 B
• Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller firmware
• Insufficient memory
Printer font error
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

921 D
• A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
• The SD card data is corrupted.
76
Net File function error
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file
is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are defective and they cannot be
925 B debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes,
document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
• Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
3
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) "filesystem" repair failed
(-8) "filesystem" mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures
for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
77
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the machine power off
and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with
SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting – Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
• Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
• Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
• All captured documents will be erased
• DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
3 • Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
• The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must be
configured again (this will use a lot of time).
Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents that are
scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting – All), then turn the
machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer before you
do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If "Procedure 3" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
Software error 1
990 D The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue.
• Software defective, re-boot
Software error 2
The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990, recovery

991 C
processing allows the program to continue.
• Software defective, re-boot
In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
78
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent logged
errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you will see
detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the software file name, line
number, and so on.
• 1) is the recommended method, because another SC could write over the information for the previous
SC.
Undefined error
3
992 D Defective software program
• An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Application Item Error
The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach the maximum
994 C
limit for the operation panel structure.
• Too much executed application items
Controller Board Mismatch
995 D The information on the controller board does not match that of the machine
• Wrong controller board installed
Software Error 3: Cannot select application function
An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the operation panel.
997 B
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed
correctly.
79
Software Error 4: Application cannot start
Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after the machine power
is turned on. No applications start correctly, and all end abnormally.
998 D
• Software bug
• A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed
correctly.
80
4. Appendix: Service Program Mode
Tables
System SP Table-1
SP1-xxx: Feed
Leading Edge Registration:

1001*
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation timing. 4
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain

[–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 By-pass: Thick 1
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002* Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each
mode.
81
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3 [–4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
4 Registration Buckle Adjustment

1003* Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2

[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
012 LCT: Plain
013 LCT: Thick1 [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
82
System SP Table-1
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing [-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 LG Detection
0: LT SEF, 1: LG
Fusing Idling
Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough time has
1103* elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This ensures even heat on the
hot roller.
4
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if the room is
cold.). You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing interval with SP1103-2.
001 Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On
002 Interval [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec.]
Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 30 sec. for

every job (when the original is set on the ARDF, when
the ARDF cover is opened, etc.) and the fusing unit has
003 Idling Time at Every Job reached the reload temperature (optimum
temperature for operation).
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec.]
0: No idling done before a job.
83
Fusing Temperature Control
On-Off/Phase
Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting, be sure to turn
the machine off and on again with the main power switch to enable the new setting.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to bring the
hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off. Determines the on-time from
the present temperature (detected by the thermistor on the hot roller) and the temperature
of 1 cycle before.
1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the temperature; at the
4 1104* lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the higher temperature the fusing lamp is
off.
Change this setting to "0" only if the user has excessive electrical noise or interference on
the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage to drop when power is applied
using the ON/OFF control method.
Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply lines, or if
the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical devices such as fluorescent
lights. Before changing this setting, make sure that the machine is connected to a power
supply not shared by other electrical equipment.
• Selecting Phase control ("1") could cause the fusing temperature control board to
emit low pitched noise
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the roller for the
quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine has two fusing lamps: one
1105* heats the center of the roller, the other heats both ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted
separately.
The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing temperature
exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a re-load temperature (Re-
load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

Roller Center
001 C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
84
System SP Table-1
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

Roller Ends
002 C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting depends on the target
temperature.
003 Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1 (Roller Center:
Trays) 4
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on the target
temperature.
004 Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
• Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller Ends:
Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the hot roller for
022 each paper type.
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

005 Roller Center: M-Thick
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]

006 Roller Ends: M-Thick
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]
007 Roller Center: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1
009 Roller Center: Thick 2

[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Roller Ends: Thick 2
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]

011 Roller Center: Thin
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
85
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 135 / 1 deg]

012 Roller Ends: Thin
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain [100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick [100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

017 Roller Center: Special 1
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
4 C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
018 Roller Ends: Special 1
C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]

C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
023 Feed Waiting: Plain Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for each
paper type.
024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1 0=Off, 1=On
026 Feed Waiting: Thick 2 The paper waits at the registration roller until the
fusing temperature reaches the prescribed
temperature (adjustable with SP1105-028 to
-37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin
If you enable this feature, also set SP 1105-38
to a convenient value for the customer.
86
System SP Table-1
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain
029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1 Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
temperature to exit the feed waiting mode.
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2
035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2 4

036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified with
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time this SP has passed even though the fusing
temperature has not reached the prescribed
temperature.
0: Disabled.
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing unit.
002 Roller Ends [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the machine.
004 Machine Inside [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
Fusing Nip Band Check

1109*
Checks the fusing nip band.
001 Execution
87
Idling Rotation Time [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 sec]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Pre-Idling Time [5 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

003
Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit for measuring the nip.
Fusing Jam Detection

1159
SC Code Display
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0:OFF, 1:ON
4 This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late jams occur in
the fusing unit. After this SP code is turned on, a counter monitors the number of paper
late jams that occur in the fusing unit. After the 3rd occurrence of a fusing jam, SC559 is
issued and the machine cannot be used until the service technician releases the error.
• Switching the machine off/on does not reset this jam counter. The counter is reset
after the cause of the jam has been removed and a sheet of paper successfully
passes the fusing exit sensor.
Motor Speed Adjustment
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor speed in 0.05%
increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801* Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,
Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor
001 Regist: 90: Thick 2
002 Regist: 154: Thick 1

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]
003 Regist: 180: Plain
004 Regist: 230: Plain
88
System SP Table-1
005 Feed: 90: Thick 2

[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]
006 Feed: 154: Thick 1
007 Feed: 180: Plain

[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]
008 Feed: 230: Plain
009 Duplex_CW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
010 Duplex_CW: 154: Thick 1
011 Duplex_CW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
012 Duplex_CW: 230: Plain 4
013 Duplex_CCW: 90: Thick 2
[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
014 Duplex_CCW: 154: Thick 1
015 Duplex_CCW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
016 Duplex_CCW: 230: Plain
89
017 Inverter_CW: 90: Thick 2
018 Inverter_CW: 154: Thick 1
019 Inverter_CW: 180: Plain
020 Inverter_CW: 230: Plain
021 Inverter_CCW: 90: Thick 2
022 Inverter_CCW: 154: Thick 1
023 Inverter_CCW: 180: Plain
4 024 Inverter_CCW: 230: Plain

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
025 Exit_CW: 90: Thick 2
026 Exit_CW: 154: Thick 1
027 Exit_CW: 180: Plain
028 Exit_CW: 230: Plain
029 Bridge: 90: Thick 2
030 Bridge: 154: Thick 1
031 Bridge: 180: Plain
032 Bridge: 230: Plain
90
System SP Table-1
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230 4
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
1902 Cleaning Web Setting
Web Consumption [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]

001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
C1b/C1.5b: [3 to 130 / 8.4 / 0.1 sec]

Web Motor Interval
002 C1c/C1.5c: [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.
Web Motor Time [0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]

003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
C1b/C1.5b: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
C1b/C1.5b: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004 C1c/C1.5c: EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
C1c/C1.5c: ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.
91
Web Motor Interval: Thick 1 [3 to 130 / 11.2 / 0.1 sec]

005
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation (thick 1).
Web Motor Interval: Thick 2 [3 to 130 / 16.8 / 0.1 sec]

006
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation (thick 2).
Paper Interval Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing edge detection
and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting, the machine determines that
the paper is still being fed.
4 Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]

008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On [0 to 10 / 2 / 1 times]

009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle [0 to 30 / 5 / 1 sec]

010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle [0 to 10 / 2 / 1 times]

011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
1903 Cleaning Web Setting
Total Paper Counter [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

001
Displays the total paper feeding time.
Total Web Motor Drive Time [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

002
Displays the total time of web motor rotation.
1907 Paper Feed Timing Adj. (DFU)
001 Feed Solenoid ON: Plain

[-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm]
002 Feed Solenoid ON: Thick
92
System SP Table-1
003 Feed Solenoid OFF: Plain
004 Feed Solenoid OFF: Thick
005 Feed Clutch ON: Plain
006 Feed Clutch ON: Thick [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
007 Stop Position before Inverter
008 Stop Position after Inverter
009 Re-Feed Stop Position
010 By-pass Solenoid OFF [0 to 40 / 0 / 1 mm] 4

011 By-pass Solenoid ON [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
012 By-pass Feed Clutch ON
013 Exit Roller: Shift: 180
014 Exit Roller: Shift: 230
015 Exit: Junction Solenoid ON
016 Exit: Junction Solenoid OFF [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
017 Bridge: Junction Solenoid ON
018 Bridge: Junction Solenoid OFF
019 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid ON
020 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid OFF
021 Shift Motor ON [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
1908 Paper Bank Feed Timing Adj (DFU)
001 Feed Clutch ON: Plain

[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
002 Feed Clutch ON: Thick
CPM Down Setting

1916 When this machine gets a sequence of coping/printing jobs, the machine uses CPM
down mode to prevent the fusing temperature from becoming too low.
93
001 Temp.: Plain
002 Temp.: M-Thick

Adjusts the thresholds for each environmental
003 Temp.: Thick 1 condition (between Low and Medium).
[10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg]
004 Temp.: Thick 2
005 Temp.: Thin
006 ON/OFF: Low: Plain
007 ON/OFF: Low: M-Thick
4 008 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 1
009 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 2

Turns on or off the CPM down setting for each
010 ON/OFF: Low: Thin paper type and ambient temperature.
011 ON/OFF: Medium: Plain [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]

0= Off, 1= On
012 ON/OFF: Medium: M-Thick
013 ON/OFF: Medium:: Thick 1
014 ON/OFF: Medium: Thick 2
015 ON/OFF: Medium: Thin
016 Waiting Time: Low: Plain
017 Waiting Time: Low: M-Thick
018 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 1
019 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 2 Adjusts the threshold time to enter the CPM
down mode.
020 Waiting Time: Low: Thin [0 to 180 / 60 / 1 sec]
021 Waiting Time: Medium: Plain The machine determines whether the CPM
down mode is activated or not after the time
022 Waiting Time: Medium: M-Thick specified with these SPs has passed.
023 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 1
024 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 2
025 Waiting Time: Medium: Thin
94
System SP Table-1
026 Temp.: Low: Plain
027 Temp.: Low: Plain
028 Temp.: Low: Thick 1

Adjusts the threshold temperature of the
029 Temp.: Low: Thick 2 fusing unit to enter the CPM down mode.
030 Temp.: Low: Thin [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg]
If the temperature of the fusing unit is less than
031 Temp.: Medium: Plain
the temperature specified with these SPs, the
032 Temp.: Medium: M-Thick machine changes the CPM (adjustable with
SP1916-36 to -45).
033 Temp.: Medium: Thick 1 4
034 Temp.: Medium: Thick 2
035 Temp.: Medium: Thin
Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode.

036 CPM: Low: Plain C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

037 CPM: Low: M-Thick C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

038 CPM: Low: Thick 1 C1b/C1.5b: [5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]

039 CPM: Low: Thick 2
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
040 CPM: Low: Thin

041 CPM: Medium: Plain C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
042 CPM: Medium: M-Thick

043 CPM: Medium: Thick 1 C1b/C1.5b: [5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]
95

044 CPM: Medium: Thick 2
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]

045 CPM: Medium: Thin C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm]
C1c/C1.5c: [30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
1930 OnOff Time Adjust
On Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 40 / 10 msec]

001 Adjusts the Off-On interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("On" means that the transfer
4 belt is in contact with the drum.)
Off Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 20 / 10 msec]

002 Adjusts the On-Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("Off" means that the transfer
belt is away from the drum.)
Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

1950
Not used
96
System SP Table-2
System SP Table-2
SP2-xxx: Drum
2001* Charge Bias
Setting (Copying) [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 V]

001
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying.
Setting (P Pattern) [0 to 700 / 250 / 10 V]
002 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID sensor pattern
4
(for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller voltage is this value plus
the value of SP2001-1.
2005* Bias Control
Bias Correction 1 [0.1 to 1 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSDP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
Bias Correction 2 [0.1 to 1 / 0.9 / 0.05 step]
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSDP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
Bias Adjustment 1 [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol]

003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
97
Magnification Adjustment
Main Scan [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 %]

2102*
Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and printer mode.
Press "Clear/Stop" key to toggle plus or minus.
Erase Margin Adjustment
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

2103* L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)
M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
4 S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge

[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
LD Power Adjustment
2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
98
System SP Table-2
001 LD1: Copy

[–50 to 79 / -24 (C1b/C1.5b), 5 (C1c/C1.5c) /1 ]
002 LD2: Copy
003 LD1: Printer/Fax

[–50 to 79 / -44 (C1b/C1.5b), -25 (C1c/C1.5c)/1 ]
004 LD2: Printer/Fax
2106* POL REV TIME (Polygon motor rotation time)
PRE TIME [0 to 60 / 10 /1 sec]
001 Adjusts the time of polygon motor rotation before a job.
If this is set to "0", this SP is not activated. 4

POST TIME [0 to 60 / 0 /1 sec]
Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation after a job.

002
If this is set to "0", the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode. However, if the
machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor will ignore the zero setting
and switch itself off.
2109 Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
001 Pattern Selection
Test pattern of the GAVD
0: None
13: Independent Pattern (3 dot)
1: Vertical Line (1 dot)
14: Trimming Area
2: Vertical Line (2 dot)
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
3: Horizontal Line (1 dot)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
4: Horizontal Line (2 dot)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
12: Independent Pattern (2 dot)
99
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density Set the density of the test pattern which is output in
SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale patterns.
2201* Development Bias Adjustment
Development Bias [200 to 700 / 560 / 10V ]
001 Adjusts the development bias for copying.
Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum.
4 002
ID Sensor Pattern [200 to 700 / 400 / 10V ]
Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP
Forced Toner Supply

2207 Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30 seconds. To start,
press .
Toner Supply Mode [0: Sensor, 1: pixel ]
2208* Selects the toner mode.

If you select "1", SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image pixel count
modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is defective.
2209* Toner Supply Rate
Toner Rate [10 to 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg ]
Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor. The length of
001 time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by the TD sensor and ID sensor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower value if the user
tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
Correction Data [25 to 300 / 300 / 25 ]
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to adjust K, but
002 the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle. This change is
corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check the toner supply condition.
The lower the value of K, the lower the toner density
100
System SP Table-2
P Pattern Cycle
2210*
Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
Job Page Count [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 sheet]
001* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not make many
copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects of seasonal and weather
changes.
Forced Page Count [2 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet]
002* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing.

Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for customers who
use the copier for long copy jobs.
4
Toner End Setting
Selects the detection type for toner end.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
[0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies]
2213*
• 90 copies: Toner end is determined if a low density image (Vref < Vt(10)) is detected
90 times after toner near end.
• If "1" is selected, the machine stops printing when the TD sensor output drops below
the prescribed level.
• Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high density.
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after replacing the
development unit with another development unit that contains toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220* 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit and the
machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit into SP2-220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220 back to the
original value.
101
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer [0 to 2000 / 0 / 100 sheets]
2221* Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and development/transfer
motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning operations. This reverse rotation
will interrupt a multiple printing job.
2223* Vt Display
Current [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
001
Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy.
Average 10 copies [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]

4 002
Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the previous 10 copies).
Rate of Change [-10000 to 10000 / 0 / 1]

003
Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output.
GAIN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004
Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply motor.
Image Pixel Count [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

005
Displays the image pixel count.
Developer Lot
2228* Displays the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the top edge
of the developer pack.)
Transfer Current Adjustment
2301* If the transfer current of image area is set highly than normal, the print image is easily
come out. If the leading transfer current is set as same, the black line is come out due to
exfoliation leave.
Image Area: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A ]

001
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper
Image Area: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A ]

002
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper
102
System SP Table-2
Leading Edge: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
003 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and
high temperature conditions.
Leading Edge: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
004 Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the second side of the paper.
By-pass: Image Area [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A ]
005 Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray.
4
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher setting.
By-pass: Leading Edge [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by-pass
006 tray.
No Image Area [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A ]

008
Adjusts the transfer current for copying.
2309* Current: Paper Size Correction
Paper Lower Width (a) [1 to 150 / 150 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and
001 development bias corrections.
Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a small
width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the transfer current will be
multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
Paper Upper Width (b) [151 to 296 / 216 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge voltage, and
002 development bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and SP2-309-6 (by-
pass).
103
Paper Tray: Plain (alpha) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

003 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is less than the
setting of SP2-309-1.
Paper Tray: Plain (beta) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

By-pass: Plain (gamma) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

4 setting of SP2-309-1.
By-pass: Plain (delta) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

007 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
008 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (beta)
009 By-pass: Thick 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
010 By-pass: Thick 1 (delta)
011 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
012 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (beta)
013 By-pass: Thick 2 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 ]
014 By-pass: Thick 2 (delta)
015 Paper Tray: M-Thick (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
016 Paper Tray: M-Thick (beta)
017 By-pass: M-Thick (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
018 By-pass: M-Thick (delta)
019 Paper Tray: Thin (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
020 Paper Tray: Thin (beta)
104
System SP Table-2
021 By-pass: Thin (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
022 By-pass: Thin (delta)
023 Paper Tray: Special 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
024 Paper Tray: Special 1 (beta)
025 By-pass: Special 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
026 By-pass: Special 1 (delta)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
028 Paper Tray: Special 2 (beta) 4
[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
032 Paper Tray: Special 3 (beta)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
TD Sensor Initial Setting Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to enter the lot
number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the edge of the developer
2801* package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD
sensor output about 3.0 V. Press "Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output
voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or adding new
developer.
TD Sensor Manual Setting

2802*
Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following.
105
VTS [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]
Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).

001
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already
contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from another machine for
test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar procedure as for SP2-220.
VTMAX [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]

002
Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1.
VTMIN [1 to 5 / 1 / 0.01vol ]
003
4 Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1.
Process Setting
2805* Performs the developer initialization. Press "Execute" to start. This SP should be performed
after doing SP2801 at installation and after replacing the drum.
Grayscale Setting
2810
Initializes the LD power setting. This SP should be done after replacing the drum.
2812* Drum Reverse Rotation (SSP)
Reverse time [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 ]
001
Sets the reverse time of the drum motor after the end of a job.
Interval time [0 to 19 / 9 /1 ]
002
Sets the waiting time of the drum motor reverse after the end of a job.
2912* Transfer Reverse Rotation
Interval [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 ]
002
Sets the reverse time of the transfer/development motor after the end of a job.
2914* Paper Setting
106
System SP Table-2
C-alpha [0 to 400 / 150 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-
pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
001 SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of black dots or
breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass
feed tray.
C-beta [0 to 400 / 0 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-
002 pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
SP2-309-2. 4
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small width
is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
B-gamma [0 to 300 / 200 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass
003 tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
SP2-309-1.
B-delta [0 to 300 / 50 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass
004 tray. The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of
SP2-309-2.
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = No, 1= Yes]

2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
107
Transfer Cleaning Blade Forming (SSP)
Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between sheets on the
transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt surface and the cleaning blade.
2964*
Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control feature may
reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of toner on the surface of the
transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the friction between the belt and the blade
increases, and could cause the blade to bend or scour the surface of the belt.
001 0: OFF, 1: ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Pattern Interval [1 to 100 / 15 / 1 sheet]
4 003 Pattern Number [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 line]
004 Pattern LD Power [0 to 15 / 2 / 1 ]
Grayscale Limit (SSP)
2972* Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The halftone
density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the intensity of the LD beam
according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit [0 to 100 / 58 (C1b/C1.5b), 63 (C1c/C1.5c)/ 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001
A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the image
contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce this value to
make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit [0 to 100 / 52 (C1b/C1.5b), 57 (C1c/C1.5c) / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.
A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the scale.
Grayscale Cycle (SSP) [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
2973* Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the OPC. If the
number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if the door is opened and
closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density
108
System SP Table-2
Adjustment Mode [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and ID sensor
output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
Near End Setting
Detection Time [0 to 2000 / 0 / 10 sec ]
2975* Sets a time for toner supply motor rotation for issuing the toner near end warning on the
operation panel. The time may need to be shorter for customers who run especially large
print jobs (working at night, for example) to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end
condition so toner out does not interrupt a long job.
4
Bottle Motor Time
Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when the toner
bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count (SP2975) is working
properly.
2976*
When SP2975 is set to any value other than "0", this value is displayed when it matches
the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to "0", SP2976 is disabled. SP2976 is
automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.)
Time [0 to 7,000,000 / 0 / 1 msec]
Toner End Status

2977*
Indicates the toner near end or end condition.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Detected by SP2975-001
001 Near End 2: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and Vsp > 0.6
3: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.45
4: 0.45 > Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and toner end counter > 300
5 to 10: Not used
109
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Vsp > 2.0
2: Toner end counter > 90 when SP2213-001 is set to "0".
3: Toner end counter < 90 and Vt (10) > (Vref + 0.3) when SP2213-001
002 End
is set to "0".
4: When SP2213-001 is set to "2"
5: Vsp > 0.9 when SP2213-001 is set to "2"
6: Special order
4 7 to 10: Not used
Charge Counter [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before the charge
2980* input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in the polarity of the carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and cause
lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified number of
copies can compensate for this effect.
110
System SP Table-3
System SP Table-3
SP3-xxx: Process
3001* P Sensor Setting
Current [0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001 Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call error after
clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
4
ID Initialization -
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum (VSG) is adjusted
002 automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the ID sensor,
replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
Toner End Setting, ON/OFF DFU

3045*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
P Sensor Output
Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control.

3103* If the P sensor does not detect the P pattern, "VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V" is displayed
and an SC code is generated.
If the P sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, "VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0 V" is
displayed and an SC code is generated.
001 Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
002 Vsp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
003 Vsdp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
004 Vsm/Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1]
3902* New PCU Detection (Not used)
111
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
On/OFF Setting
001 0: On, 1: Off
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing unit.
Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning
3905* "Cleaning A": 15 sec. off/on cycle for the fusing motor.
"Cleaning B": Off (45 sec.) and On (15 sec.) cycle for the fusing motor.
1st Cleaning: Interval
4 001
Sets the threshold for the 1st cleaning mode.
"Cleaning A" is done once.
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 sheets]
1st Cleaning: Mode Setting
002 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
2nd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 2nd cleaning mode.

003
"Cleaning A" is done twice.
[6 to 49 / 30 / 1 sheets]
2nd Cleaning: Mode Setting
004 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 2nd cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
3rd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 3rd cleaning mode.

005 "Cleaning A" is done twice and "Cleaning B" is done "N" times.
"N" is specified with SP3905-006.

[50 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheets]
112
System SP Table-3
3rd Cleaning: Mode Setting
Sets the number of execution times of the 3rd cleaning mode.

[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
006
• All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after the cleaning cycle
ends.
Cleaning Priority Setting
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheets]
007
0: Priority to printing (No job interruption)
1: Priority to cleaning (Job interruption)
4
113
System SP Table-4
SP4-xxx: Scanner
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification ADJ
4008* Adjusts the magnification of the sub scan direction during scanning. Changing this value
changes the scanner motor speed. Press to toggle ±.
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% ]
4 Scanner Leading Edge Registration ADJ
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning. Press to toggle ±.

4010*
[–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]
As you enter a negative value, the image moves toward the leading edge.
Scanner Side-to-Side Registration ADJ
Adjusts side-to-side registration for scanning. Press to toggle ±.
4011* CS: [–2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]

MS: [–4.2 to 4.2 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]
As you enter negative values, the image will disappear at the left, and as you enter positive
values, the image will appear at the left.
Scanner Erase Margin: Scale
Adjusts scanning margins for the leading and trailing edges (sub scan) and right and left
edge (main scan).
4012*
• Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the printer
margin.
• These settings are adjusted to erase shadows caused by the gap between the
original and the scale of the scanner unit.
001 Book: Leading Edge [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
002 Book: Trailing Edge [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Book: Left [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
114
System SP Table-4
004 Book: Right [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 ADF: Leading Edge [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 ADF: Right [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 ADF: Left [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Scanner Free Run

4013
Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off.
001 Lamp: ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Lamp: OFF 0=Off, 1=On 4
4014 Scanner Free Run
001 HP Detection Enable Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check
4020* This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can cause black
lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is displayed, but processing
does not stop.
Check On/Off Change
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when the original
size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on the white plate above
the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity of the level of detection is
adjusted with SP4020-2.
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off. No dust warning.
1: On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
• Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the white plate
above the scanning glass.
115
Detect Level
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is available
only after SP4020-1 is switched on.
[0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to
002 increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see not black streaks in
copies, lower the setting.
• Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the originals
in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and
4 the warning remains on.
Correction Level
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF.
003
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak, 3: Strong, 4: Strongest
APS Sensor Output Display

4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (
p.271 "Input Check")
APS A5/LT Size Detection
Determines whether an original of non-standard size is detected as A5/HLT size by the

APS sensor.
4303* 0: No original
1: A5/HLT- lengthwise (SEF)
2:A5/HLT - Sideways (LEF)
If "0" is selected, "Cannot detect original size" will be displayed.
116
System SP Table-4
Original Size Detection
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal Detection ( the machine detects A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the
4305 paper size setting)
1: A4-sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-sideways A4-Lenghtwise
3: 8K 16K
Scanner Erase Margin

4400*
These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning. 4
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge

[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
005 ADF: Leading Edge [0 to 3 / 2 / 0.1 mm]
007 ADF: Right

[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 ADF: Left
117
IPU Test Pattern
Selects the IPU test Pattern.
[0 to 28 / 0 / 1]
0: Scanned image 15: Gray pattern (1)
1: Gradation main scan A 16: Gray pattern (2)
2: Gradation main scan B 17: Gray pattern (3)
3: Gradation main scan C 18: Shading pattern
4 4: Gradation main scan D 19: Thin line pattern
5: Gradation sub scan (1) 20: Scanned + Grid pattern

4417
Test Pattern 6: Grid pattern 21: Scanned + Grid scale
Selection 7: Slant grid pattern 22: Scanned + Color patch
8: Gradation K 23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
9: Check pattern 16 24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
10: Gray patch 16 (1) 25: Gray Scale 18 text
11: Gray patch 16 (2) 26: Gray Scale 18 photo
12: Gray patch 64 27: Gray Scale 256 text
13: Grid pattern (2) 28: Gray Scale 256 photo
14: Color patch K
4429* ICI Output Selection
001 Copy Adjusts the density of the embedded message with the
copy data security unit.
002 Scanner
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
003 Fax 3: Darkest density
4450* Scan Image Path Selection
118
System SP Table-4
Black Reduction ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=OFF, 1=ON

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
Digital AE Setting
4460* Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust its level
for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
001 Lower Limit

CS: [0 to 1020 / 364 / 4 digit] 4
MS: [0 to 1020 / 408 / 4 digit]
002 Background Level [512 to 1535 / 972 / 1 digit]
Printer Vector Correction

4540* This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors [R, G, B,
Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector correction value.
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-040 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
119
4550* Scanner: Text/Chart
4551* Scanner: Text
4552* Scanner: Text (Dropout Color)
4553* Scanner: Text/photo
4554* Scanner: Photo
4565* Scanner: Gray Scale
4570* Scanner: Color: Text/Photo
4 4571* Scanner: Color: Photo
4572* Scanner: Color: Auto Color
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ]
MTF: 0(Off), 1-15(High)
0: MTF OFF
-005
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast.
Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smoothing: 0(x1), 1-7(High) [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ]

-006
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images.
Brightness: 1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]

-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast: 1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]

-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
Ind. Dot Erase: 0(x1), 1-7(High) [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker
effect.
0: Not activated
4580* Fax: Text/Chart
4581* Fax: Text
4582* Fax: Text/Photo
120
System SP Table-4
4583* Fax: /Photo
4584* Fax: Original 1
4585* Fax: Original 2
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ]
MTF: 0(Off), 1-15(High)
0: MTF OFF
-005
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast.
Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
Smoothing: 0(x1), 1-7(High) [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 ]

-006
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images. 4
Brightness: 1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
Contrast: 1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 ]

-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
Ind. Dot Erase: 0(x1), 1-7(High) [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
-009 Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker
effect.
0: Not activated
SBU Version
4600
Displays the ID of the SBU.
4602 Scanner Memory Access
Enables the read and write check for the SBU

001 Scanner Memory Access
registers.
002 Address Setting

Not used
003 Data Setting
4603 AGC Execution
002 HP Detection Enable Executes the AGC with the scanner detection.
121
003 HP Detection Disable Executes the AGC with the scanner detection.
FGATE Open/Close
Opens or closes the FGATE signal. This SP automatically returns to the default status (close)
4604 after exiting this SP.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
White Balance Target: R
4 4606 This value is the target value of red for the white level adjustment (CS model only).
[0 to 1023 / 784 / 1 digit]
4607 White Balance Target: G
This value is the target value of green for the white level adjustment.
001 CS: [1023 to 0 / 784 / 1 digit]
MS: [1023 to 1 / 876 / 1 digit]
White Balance Target: B (CS model only)
4608 This value is the target value of blue for the white level adjustment.
[1023 to 0 / 784 / 1 digit]
4623 Black Level Rough/Fine Adj. Display (CS model only)
Latest: RE Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

001 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: RO Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

002 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: RE Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

003 Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
122
System SP Table-4
Latest: RO Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

004 Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: RE B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

005 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the SBU (black
and white printing speed).
Latest: RO B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

006 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (black
4
Latest: RE B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]
007 Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the SBU (black and
white printing speed).
Latest: RO B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

008 Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (black and
• RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
Latest: GE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: GO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
123
Latest: GE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: GO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: GE B/W
4
005 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (black
Latest: GO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (black
Latest: GE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the SBU (black and
Latest: GO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (black
• GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
124
System SP Table-4
Latest: BE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: BO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: BE Color
4
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]
Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: BO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (color
printing speed).
Latest: BE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU (black
Latest: BO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black
Latest: BE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU (black and
125
Latest: BO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit]

Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black and
• BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
Gain Adjustment Display (CS model only)
4628 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4 Only for the color scanner
001 Latest: RE Color
002 Latest: RO Color

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Latest: RE B/W
004 Latest: RO B/W
Gain Adjustment Display
4629 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
SP4629-003 and -004 are used only for the color scanner model.
001 Latest: GE Color
002 Latest: GO Color

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Latest: GE B/W
004 Latest: GO B/W

4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
126
System SP Table-4
001 Latest: BE Color
002 Latest: BO Color

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Latest: BE B/W
004 Latest: BO B/W
SBU: Black Level Loop (CS model only)
4640 Displays the black level adjustment time for each mode.
The black level adjustment is done twice. The 1st adjustment decides the reference value for
the 2nd adjustment.
4
001 Loop Count (1st): Color
002 Loop Count (1st): B/W

[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 ]
003 Loop Count (2nd): Color
004 Loop Count (2nd): B/W
SBU: White Level Loop

4641
Displays the white level adjustment time for each mode.
001 Loop Count: Color

[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Loop Count: B/W
SBU: Time-out Error

4646
Displays the result of the AGC adjustment.
001 Black Level Adjustment 1 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Black Level Adjustment 2 0:OK, 1: AGC adjustment failure
127
White Level Adjustment [0 x 0000 to 0 x 003F / 0 / 1 Hex ]
Bit 0: Gain adjustment error (even)

Bit 1: Gain adjustment error (odd)
003 Bit 2: White level error (RE)
Bit 3: White level error (RO)

Bit 4: White level error (BE)
Bit 5: White level error (BO)
SBU Error
4 Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
4647 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure
Power-On
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001, -002 or -003
occurs.
4654* Black Level 1: Rough/Fine Adj. Display (CS model only)
Previous: RE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the
SBU (color printing speed).
Previous: RO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU
(color printing speed).
Previous: RE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the SBU
128
System SP Table-4
Previous: RO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU
Previous: RE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the
SBU (black and white printing speed).
Previous: RO B/W
4
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU
(black and white printing speed).
Previous: RE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the SBU
Previous: RO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU
Previous: GE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in the
129
Previous: GO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
Previous: GE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the
Previous: GO Color
4
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU
Previous: GE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal in the
Previous: GO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the
Previous: GE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the
Previous: GO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU
130
System SP Table-4
Previous: BE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
Previous: BO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
4
Previous: BE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU
Previous: BO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU
Previous: BE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
Previous: BO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
Previous: BE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU
131
Previous: BO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU

4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4
001 Previous: RE Color
002 Previous: RO Color

[ 0 255 / 64 / 1 digit]
003 Previous: RE B/W
004 Previous: RO B/W
4659 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Previous: GE Color
002 Previous: GO Color

[ 0 255 / 64 / 1 digit]
003 Previous: GE B/W
004 Previous: GO B/W

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Previous: BE Color
002 Previous: BO Color

[ 0 255 / 64 / 1 digit]
003 Previous: BE B/W
004 Previous: BO B/W
132
System SP Table-4
Before Previous: RE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in
the SBU (color printing speed).
Before Previous: RO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in
4
Before Previous: RE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the
Before Previous: RO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
Before Previous: RE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in
the SBU (black and white printing speed).
Before Previous: RO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in
Before Previous: RE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even red signal in the
133
Before Previous: RO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the
Before Previous: GE Color

4
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal
in the SBU (color printing speed).
Before Previous: GO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in
Before Previous: GE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in
Before Previous: GO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in
Before Previous: GE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even green signal
in the SBU (black and white printing speed).
134
System SP Table-4
Before Previous: GO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in
Before Previous: GE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in
Before Previous: GO B/W

4
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in
Before Previous: BE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in
Before Previous: BO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in
Before Previous: BE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
135
Before Previous: BO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
Before Previous: BE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in
Before Previous: BO B/W

4
006 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ]
Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in
Before Previous: BE B/W
007 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the
Before Previous: BO B/W
008 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ]

Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the
4673 Black Level 2: Rough/Fine Adj. Display (CS model only)
Factory Setting: RE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the factory setting value of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the even
red signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
136
System SP Table-4
Factory Setting: RO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the odd
Factory Setting: RE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the even
Factory Setting: RO Color

4
004 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]
Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the odd
Factory Setting: RE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the even
red signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed).
Factory Setting: RO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

007 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

008 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

137
Factory Setting: GE Color
001 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

green signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Factory Setting: GO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

4
Factory Setting: GE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: GO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: GE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

green signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed).
Factory Setting: GO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

007 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

138
System SP Table-4
008 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: BE Color

4
001 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]
blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed).
Factory Setting: BO Color
002 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: BE Color
003 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: BO Color
004 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

Factory Setting: BE B/W
005 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

blue signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed).
139
Factory Setting: BO B/W
006 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]

007 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]


4
008 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ]
4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: RE Color
002 Factory Setting:: RO Color

[ 0 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Factory Setting: RE B/W
004 Factory Setting: RO B/W
4678 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
140
System SP Table-4
001 Factory Setting: GE Color
002 Factory Setting:: GO Color

[ 0 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Factory Setting: GE B/W
004 Factory Setting: GO B/W

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: BE Color
002 Factory Setting: BO Color

4
[ 0 255 / 0 / 1 digit]
003 Factory Setting: BE B/W
004 Factory Setting: BO B/W
Gray Balance Setting:

4685*
Adjusts the gray balance of the red signal for each scanning mode.
001 R Book Scan CS: [-512 to 511 / -32 / 1 digit ]
002 R DF Scan MS: [-512 to 511 / 25 / 1 digit ]

4686*
Adjusts the gray balance of the green signal for each scanning mode.
001 G Book Scan

CS: [-512 to 511 / -7 / 1 digit ]
002 G DF Scan MS: [-512 to 511 / 25 / 1 digit ]

4687*
Adjusts the gray balance of the blue signal for each scanning mode.
001 B Book Scan

CS: [-512 to 511 / -14 / 1 digit ]
002 B DF Scan MS: [-512 to 511 / 25 / 1 digit ]
141
DF: Density Adjustment
Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
4688*
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 % ]
White Peak Level

4690
Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.
001 RE
4 002 RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 RE: BK
004 RO: BK
White Peak Level

4691
001 GE
002 GO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 GE: BK
004 GO: BK
White Peak Level

4692
001 BE
002 BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 BE: BK
004 BO: BK
Black Peak Level

4693
Displays the peak level of the black level scanning.
142
System SP Table-4
001 RE
002 RO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 RE: BK
004 RO: BK
Black Peak Level

4694
Display the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 GE
002 GO
4
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 GE: BK
004 GO: BK
Black Peak Level

4695
Display the peak level of the black level scanning.
001 BE
002 BO
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ]
003 BE: BK
004 BO: BK
4802 DF Shading Free Run
001 Lamp ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
Executes the scanner free run of the shading movement with
002 Lamp OFF exposure lamp on or off.
Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free run continues.
4803* Home Position Adjustment (DFU) [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm ]
001 Adjusts the home position of the exposure lamp.
143
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance and

4804* Returning to Scanner HP immediately returns it to its home position.
Touch [Execute] > "Completed" > [Exit]
Moving from Scanner HP
Moves the exposure lamp a short distance away from the home position and stops.
Touch [Execute] > "Completed" > [Exit]
Do SP4804 to return the exposure lamp to its home position.
4806
4 • This SP is done before shipping the machine to another location.

• Cycling the machine power off/on also returns the exposure lamp to its home
position.
Filter Setting
This SP code sets the threshold value for independent dot erase.
4903* These adjustments are effective only for the "Custom Setting" original type.
The "0" setting disables independent dot erase.
A higher setting detects more spurious dots for erasing. However, this could erase dots
in images that contain areas filled by dithering.
001 Independent Dot Erase: Text/Photo

[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy
Changes the parameters for dithering.

4905* Dither Selection
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
4907 SBU Test Pattern Change
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Default (Scanning Image)
1: Grid pattern
2: Gradation main scan
3: Gradation sub scan
4 to 250: Default (Scanning Image)
144
System SP Table-4
4908* Factory Setting Input
Execution: ON/OFF
001 Copies the settings of the previous black level adjustment and gain adjustment to the
factory settings.
Execution Flag [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Displays the execution flag of the factory setting input. "1" means that the scanner settings
have been adjusted at the factory.
4918 Manual Gamma Adjustment (DFU)

4
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black in Photo mode or Letter mode.
Touch [Change] to open the printer gamma screen.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen.
IPU Image Pass [Path] Selection (RGB Frame Memory) DFU
4991 Selects the image path. Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
[0 to 11 / 2/ 1]
0 Scanner input RGB images
1 Scanner I/F RGB images
2 RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3 Shading data
4 Inner pattern data: Gray scale
5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction
6 RGB images done by Digital AE
7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction
8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction
9 RGB image done by Filtering correction
10 RGB images done by Full color ADS
11 RGB image done by Color correction
145
4993* Highlight Correction
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Range Selection
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
4
Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
4994* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ]
0: Text priority
High Compression PDF Setting
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
146
System SP Table-5
System SP Table-5
SP5-xxx: Mode
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
mm/inch Display Selection
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
5045* Accounting Counter

4
Counter Method
Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Displays total counter only.
1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5047* Paper Display
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
Display IP Address
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

5055*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5056* Coverage Counter Display
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
147
5061* Toner Remaining Icon Display
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
5104* A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except from the bypass
tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT
x2 respectively.
4
Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for each tray (Tray 1 to 4)
5112* [0 or 1/ 1 / -]
0: OFF
1: ON
5113* Optional Counter Type
Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:

0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key Card Down
001
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp. Key Card (Add)
12: Exp. Key Card (Deduct)
148
System SP Table-5
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external device for user
access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
002 [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
4
5114* Optional Counter I/F
MF Key Card Extension
001 Use this SP and change the setting to "1" only when the "5" (MF Key Card) is selected
with SP5113-001.
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning accounting)]
Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only

5118* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Release for normal operation [Default]
1: Prohibit access to machine
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Selects if mode clear is done for an optional counter when an optional counter is removed.
5120* 0: Yes. (Always mode clear)
1: StandBy. (Mode clear before/after a job)
2: No. (No mode clear)
Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at paper exit.
5121*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Feed, 1: Exit
149
F Size Original Setting
Selects F size original setting.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
5126*
0: 8 1/2 x 13 (Foolscap)
1: 8 1/4 x 13 (Folio)
2: 8 x 13 (F)
APS Off Mode
Selects whether the APS function is enabled or disabled with the contact of a pre-paid
4 5127*
card or coin lock.
0: Disable (APS active) [Default], 1: Enable (APS not active)
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131* [0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive files
stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5150
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
App. Switch Method
Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware switch or software
5162* switch.
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
150
System SP Table-5
Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off
Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
5167* when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external accounting device.
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with this SP
before you go into the printer SP mode.
5169*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 4
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
By-pass Tray Paper Size Error [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

5179* This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine detects
the wrong paper size for the job and during feed from the by-pass tray.
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
002 Tray 1: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
004 Tray 1: 4 0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
010 Tray 3: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
151
011 Tray 3: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
013 Tray 4: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
014 Tray 4: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
017 LCT [0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
4 RK4 Setting (Japan only)
Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device) Disconnection. If the RK4
5186* is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine
automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Copy Nv Version
5188*
Displays the NV version on the controller.
Limitless SW
5195*
DFU
5212* Page Numbering
Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on

Duplex Printout Left/Right both sides during duplexing.
003
Position [–10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both

Duplex Printout High/Low sides during duplexing.
004
Position [–10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5302* Set Time
152
System SP Table-5
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before delivery.
The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
002
EU: +60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
4
5307 Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]

Setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001 Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
153
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit,
so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
003
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
4 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
004
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Access Control (DFU)

5401*
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
154
System SP Table-5
Default Document ACL
Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external certification mode
(for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is updated according to this SP
setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
103
0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a machine that is not using document server.
4
Selects the log out type for the extend
authentication device.
162 Extend Certification Detail Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID
201 SDK1 Certification Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID

"SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". This
211 SDK2 Certification Method data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when
installed or uninstalled. (DFU)
220 SDK3 Unique ID
221 SDK3 Certification Method
230 SDK certification device
Enables or disables the log out confirmation

option.
Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
240 Detail Option
Selects the automatic log out time.
Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
155
User Code Count Clear

5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the
machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5411* LDAP Certification
Turns simple authentication on or off for LDAP.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
004 Easy Certification
0: OFF
1: ON
4 This SP is enabled only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (ON).
Password Null Not [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005
Permit 0: Password null is not permitted.
1: Password null is permitted.
5413 Lock Setting
Lockout On/Off [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1:ON

001
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
Lockout Threshold [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
Cancellation On/Off 1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and password are
003
correctly entered after the lockout function has been
executed and a specific time has passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Cancellation Time [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account after the lockout
function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
005 Counter Clear Time Not Used
156
System SP Table-5
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation ON / OFF
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the same ID and
password.
4
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
5415* Password Attack
Permissible Number [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]

001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain
illegal access to the system.
Detect Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416* Access Information
Access User Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]

001
Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack detection function.
Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]

002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password attack detection
function.
Monitor interval [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]

003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
5417 Access Attack
157
Access Permissible number [0 to 500 / 100 / 1]

001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Weight [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]

003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1]

4 004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the
certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected.
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420
• These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
001 Copy Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the copy application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
011 Document Server Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the document server.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
021 Fax Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the fax application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
031 Scanner Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the scanner application.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
041 Printer Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the printer application.
158
System SP Table-5
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 Determines whether certification is required before
a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
001 System Log Disp
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log 4
after a user authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation
panel after a user authentication failure occurs.
MF Key Card (Japan only)
Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.

5490 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user code.
5501* PM Alarm
PM Alarm Interval
Sets the PM alarm interval.

001
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
002
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
159
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
5504* 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
4 Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
5505* counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets
(for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000 (C1c) sheets). The error alarm occurs when
the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 50 (C1b/C1.5b), 100 (C1c/C1.5c) / 100 copies / step]
5507* Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply. (DFU)
0: Off, 1: On
Paper supply Alarm 0: No alarm.
001
(0:Off 1:On) 1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer
sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT,
HLT)
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in

the finisher. (DFU)
Staple Supply Alarm
002 0: Off, 1: On
(0:Off 1:On)
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. (DFU)
Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
003
(0:Off 1:On) If you select "1" the alarm will sound when the copier
detects toner end.
160
System SP Table-5
128 Interval: Others
132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4
134 Interval: A5
141 Interval: B4 The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify the paper
control call interval for the referenced paper sizes. (DFU)
142 Interval: B5 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
160 Interval: DLT
164 Interval: LG 4
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
0: Disable
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the length of

011 Jam Detection: Time Length an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

Jam Detection Continuous
012 required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens to

013 Door Open: Time Length determine when to initiate a call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
SC/Alarm Setting
5515* With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
161
001 SC Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Service Parts Near End Call
0: OFF
003 Service Parts End Call
1: ON
004 User Call
006 Communication Information Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
4 009 Non Genuine Toner Alarm 0: OFF

1: ON
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP codes, print
an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy

002 Engine Clear
process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service)

003 SCS settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
Initializes the image file system.

004 IMH Memory Clear
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored

005 MCS documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings,
007 Fax application
local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
162
System SP Table-5
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer

008 Printer application
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP
009 Scanner application
modes.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,

Web Service/Network and initializes the Job login ID.
010
application Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP

addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin settings,
011 NCS WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings. 4
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, job

012 R-FAX
history, and local storage file numbers.
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)

016 MIRS Setting
settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service)

017 CCS
settings.
018 SRM Memory Clear Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
Free Run
Performs a free run on the copier engine.

5802*
The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF -
002 TRAY2:A3 -
163
003 TRAY2:A4SEF -
Input Check
5803 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches.

( p.271 "Input Check")
Output Check
5804 Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. ( p.281 "Output
Check")
4
SC Reset
5810 Resets all level A service call conditions, such as fusing errors.
Fusing SC Reset To clear the service call, touch "Execute" on the LCD, then turn
the main power switch off/on.
Machine No. Setting (DFU) Code Set
5811* This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the machine. The allowed
entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory, and should not be
changed in the field.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call

001 Service
condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report
002 Facsimile
(UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the user mode
003 Supply
screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on

004 Operation
the user mode screen.
5816 Remote Service
164
System SP Table-5
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
4
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registor has been completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
165
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

011
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing

4 Selects the RFU timing.
013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG – C Registed
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

021
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
RCG – C Regist Detail
This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status.

022 0: RCG device not registered
1: RCG device registered

2: Device registered
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
166
System SP Table-5
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with
the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
063
• The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond the 128
character are ignored. 4
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded
064 RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
167
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
1
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
2
successful update.
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update.
4 4
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being
sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
11
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
067 12
certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully,
13 and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
14
controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful
15
completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
16
failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL
17 was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
18
notified of the failure of the certification update.
168
System SP Table-5
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
068
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.

4
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated,

even without the HDD installed.
084 Non-HDD Firm Up
0: Not allowed update
1: Allowed update
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the

previous version of the firmware before the firmware
update execution. If the option to confirm the previous
085 Firm Up User Check
version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the
firmware files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the

086 Firmware Size
firmware data files during the firmware update execution.
087 CERT: Macro Ver. Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
088 CERT: PAC Ver. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are

displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (*) indicate that
089 CERT: ID2 Code
no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
169
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification

subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are
090 CERT: Subject displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
Displays serial number for the @Remote certification.

091 CERT: Serial No.
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote

092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes ()
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
4 093 CERT: Valid Start

Displays the start time of the period for which the current
@Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the current
094 CERT: Valid End
@Remote certification is enabled.
Selection Country
150
Not used
Line Type Automatic Judgment

151
Not used
Line Type Judgment Result

152
Not used
Selection Dial/Push
153
Not used
Outside Line/Outgoing Number

154
Not used
Dial Up User Name

156
Not used
Dial Up Password
157
Not used
170
System SP Table-5
Local Phone Number

161
Not used
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming

162
Not used
Access Point
163
Not used
Line Connecting
164
Not used 4
173 Modem Serial Number Not used
Retransmission Limit
174
Not used
FAX TX Priority -
187
Not used
200 Manual Polling - Not used
Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status,
201 @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device cannot communicate
with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the Embedded

202 Letter Number
RCG Gate.
203 Confirm Execute Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
171
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
4 8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in answer to the
confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)

6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Error Code
208 Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204
or SP5816-207 was executed.
172
System SP Table-5
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

-12002
device status.
Operation Error, Incorrect Attempted registration without execution of an

-12003
Setting inquiry and no previous registration.
-12004
Attempted setting with illegal entries for 4
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
A confirmation request was made after the

-12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration was

-12007
different from the one used at confirmation.
Update certification failed because mainframe

-12008
was in use.
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

-2385
international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
Error Caused by Response -2389 Database out of service

from GW URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
173
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup.

209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this setting
4 has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the PI device code. After you change this setting, you
001 CSS PI Device Code
must turn the machine off and on.
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication

Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service
002 RCG IP Address center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / - / 1]
NVRAM Data Upload
5824 Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NVRAM Data Download

5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After downloading is
completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and on.
5828 Network Setting
174
System SP Table-5
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on

the parallel connection between the machine and a
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) computer.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for

data transfer.
052 ECP (Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.

4
065 Job Spooling [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power

off is resumed at the next power on. This SP operates only
when SP5828-065 is set to "1".
066 Job Spooling Clear: Start Time [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.

0: Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or

disabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
Job Spooling (Protocol)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
069 0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is

TELNET disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
090
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
175
Disables or enables the Web operation.

Web
091 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
(0:OFF 1:ON)
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the Ethernet

or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format: "Link-Local
address" + "Prefix Length"
145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be
abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses " below this
table.
4 147
Active IPv6 Stateless Address
1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1 to 5)
2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b)
Active IPv6 Stateless Address in the format:
151
3 "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
153 in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
4

155
5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11) in the format:
156
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this table.
IPv6 Gateway
158 This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11).
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this table.
176
System SP Table-5
Note: IPV6 Addresses

Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix Length". The
IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1. The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the following characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
4
2. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits following the
MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4. Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This abbreviation can
be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but this can be done only at one point
in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

stateless.
161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Web Item visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
236
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
177
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the
237 web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
238 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
4 0: Not display, 1:Display
Web Link1 Name

239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web URL
240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system. The
maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system.
241
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
5831 Initial Setting Clear DFU
Copier up application
002
Clears the initial setting of copier.
178
System SP Table-5
HDD Formatting
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution ends,
cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)

4
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5836* Capture Setting
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized,
001 displayed, or selected.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from the
initial system screen.
002
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1] (DFU)
071 Reduction for Copy Color
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4
179
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1] (DFU)
074 Reduction for Printer Color
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
075 Reduction for Printer B&W
0 1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3
4 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1] (DFU)
081 Format for Copy Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
083 Format Copy B&W Other 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
[0 to 0 / 0 /1] (DFU)
084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1]
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3:
TIFF/MR
180
System SP Table-5
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with
the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional File Format
Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
5840* IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth setting
006 varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1] 4
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
007 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix 0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix 0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.

Bit 1 and 0
011
00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
181
Fragment Thresh
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

042
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to self
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

043
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
4 11g Slot Time
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

045
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
Supply Name Setting

5841* Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button
on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
007 Org Stamp
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B804/B805
013 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B408
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B804
182
System SP Table-5
023 StapleBind3
GWWS Analysis (DFU)
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
1 Capture related
This is a debugging tool. It sets
5842* the debugging output mode of 2 Certification related
each Net File process.
3 Address book related
Bit SW 0011 1111
4 Machine management related
4
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
Default: 00000000 – do not change

001 Setting 1 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Adjusts the debug program mode setting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
5844 USB
Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

001
[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:

002
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU)
183
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU)
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized
as the BCD.
4 Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.

001
[0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1]
IP Address (Primary)
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab
can be used with the initial system setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
Delivery Error Display Time
006 Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs
during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device.
[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec]
IP Address (Secondary)
008 Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery server for
Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not refer to the DNS setting.
[Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
184
System SP Table-5
Delivery Server Model
Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O device.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Unknown
009
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability

4
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010 Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists

Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
011 These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of registered devices
(in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
013 Server Scheme (Primary)
014 Server port Number (Primary) [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
015 Server URL Path (Primary)
016 Server Scheme (secondary)
017 Server Port (Secondary) [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
018 Server URL Path (Secondary)
019 Capture Server Port Number
185
020 Capture Server URL Path [1 to 65535 / 80 /1]
Capture Server URL Path

021 These SPs (5845-013/014/015/016/017/018/019/020/021) listed above are
used for the scan router program.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
4 5846* UCS Setting
Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
001 displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (for Delivery Server)
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.

003 [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and
the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
006 server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step]
0: No retries
186
System SP Table-5
Delivery Server Retry Times
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1step]
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
008 Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users of
the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 step]
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
4
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
Addr Book Migration (USB -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from the SD card or flash ROM on the controller
board to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. Do SP5846 040.
040
5. Turn the machine off/on.
• Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the
data from the flash ROM on the controller board.
• We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with
SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.
• After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is deleted
from the flash ROM. If the operation fails, the data is not erased from the flash ROM.
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
187
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine
that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD
installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes
it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only
by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4 4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any user
can access the address book.
Addr Book Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.

[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1 20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2 30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM
Initialize Local Address Book

047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed
with UCS.
Initialize Delivery Addr Book

048 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery address
book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book

049 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP address
book that is controlled by UCS.
188
System SP Table-5
Initialize All Addr Book

050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by UCS.
However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book

051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing the controller
board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller board or HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or HDD. Upload
the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with SP5846-51 before removing it.
Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD. 4
Clear Backup Info.
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes only the files
053 uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove the
SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
060 2 Japan Only
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
189
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the
password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.

• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password
policy to control access to the address book.
4 Complexity Option 2
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the
password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 3
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the
password.
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

190
System SP Table-5
Complexity Option 4
Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the
password.
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

FTP Auth Port Setting 4

091 Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the individual
authorization mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1step]
Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Rep Resolution Reduction
5847-2 through 5847-6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by
the Net File page reference function.
5847*
5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile.
"NetFile" refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text [0 to 6 / 0 / 1] 0: 1x

1: 1/2x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/5x
005 Rate for Printer B&W [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x1
191
Network Quality Default for JPEG
021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function
is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1step]
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
5848* has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is equal
4 to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

002 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 Bits) 0001: Denies access to
DeskTop Binder.
003 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Bits)
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
007 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on and
off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
021 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
099 Repository: Download Image Setting
Specified the max size of the

image data that the machine
100 Repository: Download Image Max. Size can download/
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB]
Setting: Log Type: Job 1

210
No information is available at this time.
Setting: Log Type: Job 2

211
192
System SP Table-5
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
Setting: Primary Srv

213
Setting: Secondary Srv

214
Setting: Start Time

215
No information is available at this time. 4
Setting: Interval Time
216
Setting: Timing
217
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation Date"

001 Display
or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout

for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches this value,
the current date becomes the 'official' installation date for this
003 Total Counter machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
5850* Address Book Function Japan Only
193
Replacement of Circuit Classification
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at once
to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the G4 line
becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
Bluetooth
5851* Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] / [1: Private]
4 Stamp Data Download
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard
5853 disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not
have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential", "Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD.
Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284) during
a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on.
Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable
002 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature
001 is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
194
System SP Table-5
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected
002 by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card. 4
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD
009 Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
010 Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files generated
012 by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or 011 is
executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
195
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)

014 Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto an
SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)

015 This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly
from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug

016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
4 Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
Debug Save When
5858* These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine

001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller

002* Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
errors.
003* Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Log Save Function
196
System SP Table-5
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use
common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [-9999999 to 9999999 / - / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8 4
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

021
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account
after the SMTP server is validated.
022
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
197
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by UP mode.

4 S/MIVE: MIME Header Setting
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5866 E-Mail Report
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

001 Report Validity
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.
005 Add Date Field [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
Common Key Info Writing

5870
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications.
001 Writing
These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
003 Initialize
198
System SP Table-5
SD Card Appli. Move

5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see "SD Card
Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5875 SC Auto Reboot
This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs.
4
• The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC
001 Reboot Setting error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Reboot Type
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security

option for the copier. For more, see
001 Data Overwrite Security
"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
Fixed Phase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
5885* Set WIM Function
199
Allows or disallows the functions of web image monitor.

0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit:
0: Forbid all document server access
1: Forbid user mode access
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl 2: Forbid print function
3: Forbid Fax
4: Forbid scan sending
5: Forbid download
4 6: Forbid delete
7: Forbid guest user
DocSvr Format
Selects the display type for the document box list.

50
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
DocSvr Trans
51 Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Set Signature
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Signature for each e-mail
100 1: Signature for all e-mails
2: No signature
Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when
they are transmitted by an e-mail.
Set Encryption
Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted when they are
101 transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200
System SP Table-5
200 Detect Mem Leak Not used
201 DocSvr Timeout Not used
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation
stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called
SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the machine.
001 1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE]. 4
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
5907 information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be
registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the
setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
201
[0 to 23 / - / 1 step] FA
0: RICOH Aficio MP 4000B 12: LANIER MP 4000B/LD040B
1: RICOH Aficio MP 4000 13: LANIER MP 4000/LD040
2: RICOH Aficio MP 5000B 14: LANIER MP 5000B/LD050B
3: RICOH Aficio MP 5000 15: LANIER MP 5000/LD050
4: SAVIN 9040b 16: NRG MP 4000B
5: SAVIN 9040 17: NRG MP 4000
6: SAVIN 9050b 18: NRG MP 5000B
7: SAVIN 9050 19: NRG MP 5000
4 8: Gestetner MP 4000B 20: infotec MP 4000B

9: Gestetner MP 4000 21: infotec MP 4000
10: Gestetner MP 5000B 22 infotec MP 5000B
11: Gestetner MP 5000 23 infotec MP 5000
5913* Switchover Permission Time
Print Application Timer [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second step]
002 Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of
the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because
a key has not been pressed.
Switchover Permission Time 0: ON, 1: OFF
5967* Enable and disable the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image
data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you
must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or

"Full" (Professional) is installed.
5974*
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Light
1: Full
202
System SP Table-5
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the
controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
• Other network applications than @Remote or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2". Even
4
though you can change the initial settings of those network
applications, the settings do not work
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
5987* Counter Falsification Prevention
This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed. If it is detected, SC610

occurs.
0: OFF. 1: ON
5990 SP Print Mode
203
001 All ( Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default Prints out the SMC sheets.
007 NIB Summary
4 008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
204
System SP Table-6
System SP Table-6
SP6-xxx: Peripherals
ADF Registration Adjust
6006* Adjusts the side-to-side and leading edge registration for simplex and duplex original
feeding in ARDF mode. Press to toggle ±.
SP6006-5 sets the maximum setting allowed for rear edge erase.
001 Adjust Side-to-Side: 1st Side

[–3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step] 4
002 Adjust Side-to-Side: 2nd Side
003 Leading Edge [–5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
005 Leading Edge: 1st Side [–3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
006 Leading Edge: 2nd Side [–2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
007 Trailing Edge Erase [–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
6007 ADF Input Check
205
001 Original B5 Sensor
002 Original A4 Sensor
003 Original LG Sensor
004 Original Width Sensor 1
007 Original Width Sensor 4 0: Paper not detected
4 008 Original Width Sensor 5 1: Paper detected
009 Original Set Sensor
010 Separation Sensor
011 Skew Correction Sensor
012 Interval Sensor
013 Registration Sensor
014 Exit Sensor
0: ADF cover closed

015 Top Cover Sensor
1: ADF cover open
0: ADF closed
016 Lift Sensor
1: ADF open
0: Paper not detected

017 Inverter Sensor
1: Paper detected
0: HP (Pick-up roller: Up)

018 Pick-up HP Sensor
1: Not HP (Pick-up roller: Down)
0: HP (Stopper: UP)
019 Original Stopper HP Sensor
1: Not HP (Stopper: Down)
6008 ADF Output Check
206
System SP Table-6
001 Pick-up Motor: Fwd
002 Pick-up Motor: Rev
003 Feed Motor: Fwd
004 Feed Motor: Rev
005 Transport Motor: Fwd
007 Inverter Motor: Fwd
008 Inverter Motor: Rev
011 Junction Gate Solenoid 4

012 Stamp Solenoid
ADF Free Run
6009 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode. Press [ON] to start, press [OFF] to stop.
Note: This is a general free run controlled from the copier.
001 Free Run: Simplex
002 Free Run: Duplex
003 Free Run: Stamp
ADF Stamp Position Adjustment [–5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]

6010*
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
Original Size Detection Priority

6016* Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors
cannot recognize all sizes.
207
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
Folio SEF
DLT SEF
11" x 15"
NA
LG SEF Foolscap SEF
Original Size Detection
001 LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
Priority
4 LT LEF US EXE LEF
8K
DLT SEF
267 x 390 mm
EU/ 16K
LT SEF
ASIA 195 x 267 mm
16K
LT LEF
267 x 195 mm
Sheet Through Magnification [–5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1% step]
6017* Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode.
Use the key to toggle between + and - before entering the value
Skew Correction Adjustment
Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
6020* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For B804/B805)
208
System SP Table-6
001 2-Hole: DOM (Japan)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU
[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For B804/B805)
4
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For B804/B805)
209
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
007 DLT SEF
4 008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For B804/B805)
210
System SP Table-6
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF 4
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.
6132* This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the
finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The adjustment is done
perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
211
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
4 008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805).

6133* + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step]
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment

6134* Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled
and folded in the Booklet Finisher (B804).
212
System SP Table-6
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18" 4

009 Other
Folder Position Adj.

6135* This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet
Finisher B804.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Book Fold Repeat
6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
213
Finisher Free Run

6137
These SPs are used only for the B408 or B793.
B408: Free run for stapling mode (without paper feeding).

001 Free Run 1
B793: Free run for paper edge stapling.
B408: Free run for stapling mode and shift mode (without paper
002 Free Run 2 feeding).
B793: Free run for booklet stapling.
B408: Not used
4 003 Free Run 3 B793: Shipping free run. Simulates standby conditions during
shipping.
004 Free Run 4 Not used
FIN (KIN) INPUT Check

6139 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B408)
( p.271 "Input Check")
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check

6140 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B804/
B805) ( p.271 "Input Check")
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check

6144 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B408)
( p.281 "Output Check")
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check

6145 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B804/
B805) ( p.281 "Output Check")
6148* Jogger Fine Adjustment Not used
214
System SP Table-6
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
This SP corrects the distance between the output jogger
004 A4 LEF
fence and the sides of the stack.
005 B5 LEF + Value:
006 A5 LEF Increases the distance between the output jogger fence
and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT SEF - Value:
008 LG SEF Decreases the distance between the output jogger fences
and the sides of the stack.
4
009 LT SEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
010 LT LEF
011 HLT LEF
012 Other
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
• You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper.
Jogger Control [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] Not used

6150*
This SP is for the output jogger control.
6800 Sheet Conversion (Thick Paper)
Permits punching, including tab sheets.

Note: Do not change this setting.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet]
1: 1 Sheet
2: 2 Sheets
3: 3 Sheets
215
6910 Shading Control
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
ON/OFF
001 0= OFF, 1= ON
Enables or disables the shading adjustment for DF mode.
002 Shading Interval: A [0 to 60 / 3 / 1 sec] DFU
003 Shading Interval: B [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 ] DFU
216
System SP Table-7
System SP Table-7
SP7-xxx: Data Log
Total SC Counter
7401*
Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
7403* SC History
001 Latest
4
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Total Paper Jam Counter

7502*
Displays the total number of paper jams.
Total Original Jam Counter

7503*
Displays the total number of original jams.
217
13 Bank: Transport Sn 1: On
Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in" (paper late)
7504* error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. A "Check-
out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than
the prescribed time.
1 At power On
3 Tray 1: On
4 4 Tray 2: On
5 Tray 3: On
6 Tray 4: On
7 LCT: On
8 Bypass: On
9 Duplex: On
11 Vertical Transport 1: On
12 Vertical Transport 2: On
17 Registration: On
19 Fusing Exit: On
20 Paper Exit: On
21 Bridge Exit On
22 Bridge Transport: On
24 Junction Gate Sensor: On
25 Duplex Exit: On
26 Duplex Entrance: On (in)
27 Duplex Entrance: On (out)
51 Vertical Transport 1: Off
218
System SP Table-7
52 Vertical Transport 2: Off
53 Bank Transport 1: Off
54 Bank Transport 2: Off
57 Registration Sensor: Off
58 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
60 Paper Exit: Off
61 Bridge: Exit: Off 4

62 Bridge: Transport: Off
64 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
65 Duplex Exit: Off
66 Duplex Entrance: Off (in)
67 Duplex Entrance: Off (out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
219
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
4 203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor:EUP
Original Jam Location
Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when the original
7505 does not activate the sensors. A Check-in ("paper late") error occurs when the paper fails
to activate the sensor at the precise time. A Check-out ("paper lag") paper jam occurs
when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
1 At Power: On
3 Separation Sensor: On
4 Skew Correction Sensor: On
5 Interval Sensor: On
6 Registration Sensor: On
7 Inverter Sensor: On
8 Original Exit Sensor: On
53 Separation Sensor: Off
54 Skew Correction Sensor: Off
55 Interval Sensor: Off
56 Registration Sensor: Off
220
System SP Table-7
57 Inverter Sensor: Off
58 Original Exit Sensor: Off
7506* Jam Count by Paper Size
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF

4
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
221
7507 1 Last
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
7507 2 Latest 1
Sample Display:
7507 3 Latest 2 CODE:007
7507 4 Latest 3 SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
7507 5 Latest 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7507 6 Latest 5
where:
7507 7 Latest 6 CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
4 7507 8 Latest 7 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
7507 9 Latest 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
7507 10 Latest 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
7508* Original Jam History
222
System SP Table-7
001 Last
Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).
002 Last 1
Sample Display:
003 Last 2 CODE:007
004 Last 3 SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Last 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Last 5
where:
007 Last 6 CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.
008 Last 7 SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7503)
4
009 Last 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Last 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
7801 ROM No./Firmware Version
255 Displays the ROM number and firmware version numbers.
PM Counter
7803
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
001 Paper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
223
Page: Transfer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).
Page: Fuser [0 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).
Rotation: PCU [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Transfer [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

006
4 Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Fuser [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCU [0 255 / 0 / 1 %]

008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web [0 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter
7804
Resets the PM counter. To reset, press .
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
Clear PCD
002
Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except developer).
224
System SP Table-7
Clear Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
Clear Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Clear Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
Clear All Clear

006
Resets all PM counter 4
7805 Parts Counter
Page: OPC [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the OPC.
Page: Charge Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the charge roller.
Page: Developer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the developer.
Page: Belt Blade [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Page: Heat Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

005
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the hot roller.
Page: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

006
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the pressure roller.
Page: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

007
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the cleaning roller.
Page: Thermistor [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

008
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the thermistors.
225
Page: Stripper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

009
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the strippers.
Rotation: OPC [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

010
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the OPC.
Rotation: Charge Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

011
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the charge roller.
Rotation: Developer [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

012
4 Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the developer.
Rotation: Belt Blade [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

013
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the transfer belt, blade.
Rotation: Heat Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

014
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the hot roller.
Rotation: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

015
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the pressure roller.
Rotation: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

016
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the cleaning roller.
Rotation: Thermistor [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

017
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the thermistors.
Rotation: Stripper [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

018
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the strippers.
Page(%): Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

019
Displays the parts counter (rotations/PM %) of the cleaning web.
7806 Counter Clear
OPC
001
Resets the parts counter of the OPC.
226
System SP Table-7
Charge Roller
002
Resets the parts counter of the charge roller.
Developer
003
Resets the parts counter of the developer.
Belt: Blade
004
Resets the parts counter of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Heat Roller
005
Resets the parts counter of the hot roller. 4
Pressure Roller
006
Resets the parts counter of the pressure roller.
Cleaning Roller
007
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller.
Web
008
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web.
Thermistor
009
Resets the parts counter of the thermistors.
Stripper
010
Resets the parts counter of the strippers.
All Clear
011
Resets all parts counters.
SC/Jam Counter Reset
7807 Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
MF Error Counter Japan Only

7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
227
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will occur if
001 Error Total
the device is installed but disconnected.
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will occur
002 Error Staple
if the device is installed but disconnected.
MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only

7827
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
Self-Diagnose Result Display
4 7832 Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about errors. Use
the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no errors
have occurred, you will see the "No Error" message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
ADF Exposure Glass

7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning
glass of the ADF.
Counts the occurrences. Counting is done only if

001* Dust Check Counter SP4020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched
on.
Clears the count. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets

002* Dust Check Clear Counter
this counter to zero.
7853* Replacement Counter
PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
228
System SP Table-7
Fuser [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
Zero Cross [0 to 255 / 60 / 1 ]

7856* 1 Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency of the main ac power supply from
the wall socket.
4
Assert Info. DFU
7901 These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code
generated by the machine.
001* File Name Module name
002* Number of Lines Number of the lines where error occurred.
003* Location Value
7906 Prev Counter
Page: PCD [0 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD
Page: Transfer [0 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.
Page: Fuser [0 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation: PCD [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD
Rotation: Transfer [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.
229
Rotation: Fuser [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

006
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

009
4 Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning web.
7950 Replacement Date
PCD [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
7951 Remaining Counter
PCD(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
230
System SP Table-7
Fuser(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit. 4
PCD (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]
009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
Transfer (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
PM Yield Setting
7952
Sets the each yield of the following.
PCD(Page) [0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]

001
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
Transfer(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

002
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
Fuser(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]

003
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
231
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 199000 / 1 mm]

005
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 277000 / 1 mm]

006
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm]

007
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]

009
4 Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
7953 Operation Env Log
T<10 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10°C
10<=T<=17 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10°C<=T<=17°C
17<T<23 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

003
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
23<=T<=27 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

004
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 23<=T<=27
27<=T<=32 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

005
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 27<=T<=32
32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
232
System SP Table-8
System SP Table-8
SP8-xxx: Data Log 2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8codes that when used in combination with others, can
provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
4
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you
understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What It Means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when
P: Print application. the job was not stored on the document server.
S: Scan application.
233
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count
jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document server window),
Local storage (document
L: or from another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
server)
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the user uses a file
that is already on the document server. Each counter will be
discussed case by case.
Other applications
Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor.
(external network
O: Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit)
4 applications, for
example)
will also be counted with this group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small
LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it
again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What It Means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
234
System SP Table-8
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins

4
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up.
GPC For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is
in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs
Palm 2 to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files
to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.
235
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
4 PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters are recorded
SMC
in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801-1 Memory All Clear.
236
System SP Table-8
T:Total Jobs
8001
These SPs count the number of times each application is used
8002 C:Total Jobs to do a job.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8003 F:Total Jobs
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other
8004 P:Total Jobs applications are used to send a job to the document server,
plus the number of times a file already on the document server
8005 S:Total Jobs is used.
8006 L:Total Jobs
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
4
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the
SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted at
the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the
document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not
counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been
completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print job
stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both
increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only the
L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the
L: counter increments.
237
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However,
for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
8011 T:Jobs/LS
8012 C:Jobs/LS
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by
8013 F:Jobs/LS
each application, to reveal how local storage is being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the
8015 S:Jobs/LS
document server mode screen at the operation panel.
4 8016 L:Jobs/LS
8017 O:Jobs/LS
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter document
server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS
8022 C:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were
8023 F:Pjob/LS
stored on the document server originally.
8024 P:Pjob/LS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8025 S:Pjob/LS
8026 L:Pjob/LS
8027 O:Pjob/LS
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter
increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server
with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
238
System SP Table-8
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S: counter
increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L: counter
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed
with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image
Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used to output 4
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl
documents from the document server.
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application
that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor, etc.)
the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS

These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS
server that were later accessed for transmission over the
8043 F:TX Jobs/LS telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a
fax image by I-Fax).
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-
mail, the O: counter increments.
239
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl These SPs count the applications used to send files from the
document server over the telephone line or over a network
8053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl
(attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl merged for sending are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl
4 • If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter
increments.
T:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
C:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
F:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
S:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
240
System SP Table-8
L:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window
within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over the
network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set for
806x 1 Sort Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8066 1) 4
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode,

806x 4 Booklet
the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set
806x 5 Z-Fold
for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job,
806x 6 Punch
the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number
of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number
241
P:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number
S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number
L:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document
4 server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21to50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51to100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101to300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 807x 11 301to500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 807x 12 501to700 Pages
807x 6 6 to10 Pages 807x 13 701to1000 Pages
807x 7 11to20 Pages 807x 14 1001to Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode,
the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the number
of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the
copy job (SP 8072).
242
System SP Table-8
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8111 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
001 B/W Black TX
F:FAX TX Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8113 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly
on a telephone line.
4
001 B/W Black TX
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored
on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are
available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x) also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:IFAX TX Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8121 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either directly
or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
001 B/W Black TX
F:IFAX TX Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8123 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the
document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
001 B/W Black TX
243
• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:S-to-Email Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8131 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless
of whether the document server was used or not.
001 B/W Black TX
002 Color Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092
003 ACS Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092

4 S:S-to-Email Jobs
8135 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, without storing
the original on the document server.
001 B/W Black TX
002 Color Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092
003 ACS Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black-
and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the
process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if one
job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the same
document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-
Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8141
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
001 B/W Black Deliv
002 Color Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092
244
System SP Table-8
003 ACS Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8145
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
001 B/W Black Deliv

• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server 4
cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a "Color"
job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8151 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-
to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
001 B/W Black Deliv
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
8155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
001 B/W Black Deliv
245

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs. A
job is counted from when it is registered for sending, not
when it is sent.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
4 8163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs
Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical
counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the
destination from the PC through the copier.
8191 T:Total Scan PGS
8192 C:Total Scan PGS

These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that
8193 F:Total Scan PGS uses the scanner to scan images.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8195 S:Total Scan PGS
8196 L:Total Scan PGS
• SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button
in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
246
System SP Table-8
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8203 F Lsize Scan Pgs. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
S:LSize Scan PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8205 These SP codes count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs
only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display..
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the
document server .
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 4
8213 F:Scan PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel,
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS
and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the
L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8221
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is
the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
001 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The
front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.)
247
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
002 Back same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is
the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the
pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

4 8231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work
load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF

001 Large Volume
at one time.
002 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
003 Mixed Size Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation panel.
004 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly
005 Platen
on the platen.
006 Simplex / Duplex Selectable. Select "Simplex/Duplex" on the operation panel.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode,
the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the original's
page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the
Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless
of which application was used.
248
System SP Table-8
C:Scan PGS/Org [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8242
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8243
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8245
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
4
mode screen
8241 8242 8243 8245 8246
824x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
824x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
824x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
824x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
824x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode,
the count is done for the last selected mode.
249
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have
been selected at the operation panel for each application.
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt Some examples of these editing features are:
8255 S:Scan SGS/ImgEdt Erase> Border
Erase> Center
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features
4 have been used. A detailed breakdown of exactly which
features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a
TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver
is used for delivery functions.
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical
counts.
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp
in the ADF unit.
8293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel,
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp
and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
T:Scan PGS/Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP
8-441].
250
System SP Table-8
C:Scan PGS/Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP
8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445]. 4
L:Scan PGS/Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the
8306 document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output page size [SP 8-446].
830x 1 A3
830x 2 A4
830x 3 A5
830x 4 B4
830x 5 B5
830x 6 DLT
830x 7 LG
830x 8 LT
830x 9 HLT
830x 10 Full Bleed
830x 254 Other (Standard)
830x 255 Other (Custom)
251
T:Scan PGS/Rez [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8315 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
831x 1 1200dpi to
4 831x 2 600dpito1199dpi
831x 3 400dpito599dpi
831x 4 200dpito399dpi
831x 5 to199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax
application.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS
8382 C:Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by the
customer. The counter for the application used for storing
8383 F:Total PrtPGS the pages increments.
8384 P:Total PrtPGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within
8385 S:Total PrtPGS the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy
8386 L:Total PrtPGS mode screen go to the C: counter.
8387 O:Total PrtPGS
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as
2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages
are not counted as printed pages:
252
System SP Table-8
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.

Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
8391
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed 4
in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document
server. The counter for the application used to print the pages is
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS incremented.
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1

page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one
8411 Prints/Duplex side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
253
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

4 processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 2 Duplex> Duplex
842x 3 Book> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 9 8> 8pages on 1 side (8-Up)
254
System SP Table-8
842x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
4
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless
of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8434 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
print application.
255
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8437 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other
applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
4 843x 2 Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed
as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,

843x 3 User Stamp
including page numbering and date stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8442
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8443
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8444
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8447
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications.
256
System SP Table-8
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT 4
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Copier
003 Tray 2 Copier
004 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
006 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
007 Tray 6 Currently not used.
257
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on feed
8461 timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts
are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed on
one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8462
4 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8463
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
258
System SP Table-8
001 to 49%
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% to
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed
remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as
well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also 4
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server
are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Emul [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8514
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
259
001 RPCS
002 RPDL
003 PS3
004 R98
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
007 R55
4 008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL
012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links Japan Only
014 Other
• SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8521
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
8523 application.
Note:
Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
260
System SP Table-8
P:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
4
852x 1 Sort
852x 2 Stack
852x 3 Staple
852x 4 Booklet
852x 5 Z-Fold
852x 6 Punch
852x 7 Other
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still
counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine.

8531 Staples
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T: Counter [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
8581 application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the
count is done for black only.
261
O: Counter [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and
the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
Coverage Counter [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and printout pafes for each printing
mode.
4
001 B/W
011 B/W Printing Pages
T:FAX TX PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8631
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
001 B/W Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1]

8633
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
002 B/W Black TX
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are
the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:FAX TX PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using
I-Fax.
262
System SP Table-8
001 B/W Black TX
F:FAX TX PGS [0 o 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using
I-Fax.
002 B/W Black TX
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are
the same.
4
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:S-to-Email PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both
the Scan and document server applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S:S-to-Email PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the
Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are
sent to the same SMTP server together).
263
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent
to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a large
number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page
document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also
10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by both Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
4
002 Color
S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done.
• The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T: Deliv PGS/PC [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-
to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
001 B/W
002 Color
S: Deliv PGS/PC [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the
Scan application.
001 B/W
264
System SP Table-8
002 Color
8681 T:PCFAX TXPGS These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax. These
SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so the counts
for SP8681 and SP8683 are the same.
8683 F:PCFAX TXPGS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.) 4
8691 T:TX PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document
8692 C:TX PGS/LS server. The counter for the application that was used to store the
pages is incremented.
8693 F:TX PGS/LS
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8694 P:TX PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
8695 S:TX PGS/LS stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
go to the C: counter.
8696 L:TX PGS/LS
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
• When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages
sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN
(G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
265
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
T:Scan PGS/Comp [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8711 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the document server,
counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
002 TIFF (Multi/Single)
4 003 PDF
004 Other
005 High Compression PDF
S:Scan PGS/Comp [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8715 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application,
counted by the formats listed below.
001 JPEG/JPEG2000
002 TIFF (Multi/Single)
003 PDF
004 Other
005 High Compression PDF
RX PGS/Port [0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
8741
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
266
System SP Table-8
Dev Counter [0to9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for
8771 black and other color toners.
Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same as the
Total count.
Pixel Coverage Ratio

8781 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on the
equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
This SP displays the percent of space available on the

4
8791 LS Memory Remain document server for storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain [0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to
check the toner supply at any time.
8801 Note:
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than other
machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is
done for black only.
Toner Coverage 0-10% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8851
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners.
011 0 to 2%: BK
021 3 to 4%: BK
031 5 to 7%: BK
041 8 to 10%: BK

8861
267
001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.

8871
001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.
Toner Coverage 31 -% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8881
4 001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.
Printing PGS: Present Ink [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner.
Printing PGS: Log: Latest 1 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner.
Printing PGS: Log: Latest 2 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner.
Toner Coverage Count Total [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) BK
011 Coverage (PGS) BK
Machine Status [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller

001 Operation Time
is saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating).
268
System SP Table-8
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves

002 Standby Time data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save,
Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing background

003 Energy Save Time
printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes

004 Low Power Time
time while machine is performing background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

005 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off
with the power switches.
006 SC Total down time due to SC errors.

4
007 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
008 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to supply unit end.
AddBook Register
8951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration.
001 User Code User code registrations.
002 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
003 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
004 Group Group destination registrations. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Fax relay destination registrations

005 Transfer Request
for relay TX.
006 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
269
Copy application registrations

007 Copy Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations with

008 Fax Program
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer application registrations [0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

009 Printer Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner application registrations

010 Scanner Program with the Program (job settings)
4 feature.
Adomin. Counter List [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8999
Display the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total
003 Copy: BW
007 Printer BW
010 Fax Print: BW
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
015 Coverage: BW (%)
017 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
101 Transmission Total: Color
102 Transmission Total: BW
103 Fax Transmission
104 Scanner Transmission: Color
105 Scanner Transmission: BW
270
Input Check
Input Check
Copier
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a
different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Input Check
4
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
001 Tray 1: Paper Size Sensor See the table 1 following this table.
002 Tray 1: Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
003 Tray 1: Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
004 Tray 1: Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining
Tray 1:
005
Paper Height Sensor 1
See the table 2 following this table.
Tray 1:
006
007 Tray 2: Paper Size Sensor See the table 1 following this table.
008 Tray 2: Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
009 Tray 2: Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
010 Tray 2: Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining
Tray 2:
011
See the table 2 following this table.
Tray 2:
012
271
013 Tray 1: Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
018 Relay Sensor 1 Paper detected No paper detected
019 Relay Sensor 2 Paper detected No paper detected
4 020 Relay Sensor 3 No paper detected Paper detected
021 Relay Sensor 4 No paper detected Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT No paper detected Paper detected
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end
024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table.
025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close Close Open
037 LCT Set Set Not set
038 Bridge Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
272
Input Check
039 Bridge Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
040 Bridge Unit Set Detection Set Not set
041 Bridge Right Guide Open/Close Close Open
042 Bridge Left Guide Open/Close Close Open
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP
046 Fusing Unit Set Set (Bit1) Not set (Bit1)
047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full
048 Interlock Detection 1

Right or front door is
open.
Right or front door is
close.
4
Right or front door is Right or front door is
049 Interlock Detection 2
open. close.
050 Key Card Set Set Not set
051 Key Counter Set Set Not set
052 Mechanical Counter Set Not set set
053 1-Bin Unit Set Set Not set
054 1-Bin Unit: Paper Set Paper detected No paper detected
056 Dip Switch - -
057 Cleaning Web End Not end End
059 Shift Tray Set Not set Set
060 Shift Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
064 Shift Tray Sensor Stay at rear Stay at front
200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
273
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch

Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.
4 0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
274
Input Check
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-002
(Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-003
(Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-001
(Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004
(Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
4
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 1 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 0 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 0 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1
• *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that the paper
size is bracketed size.
275
APS Original Size Detection
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric version Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00011111
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X 00011110
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
4 or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O O O X X 00011100
SP 5126 controls the size
that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" X X X O O 00000011
B5 LEF - X X X O X 00000010
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" X O O X X 00001100
B5 SEF - X X O X X 00000100
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5"

A5 LEF/ SEF X X X X X 00000000
x 5.5"
Options
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
No paper
004 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift Paper detected*1
detected*1
276
Input Check
Reading
0 1
005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
006 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
009 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple No paper detected Paper detected
010 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift No paper detected Paper detected 4

011 Paper Full Sensor: 2000-Sheet Not Full Full
012 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
014 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor HP Not HP
015 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
016 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
017 Skew HP Sensor Not HP HP
018 Limit SW Not Limit Limit
019 DOOR SW Closed Open
020 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP HP
021 Staple Detection No staple detected Staple detected
022 Staple Leading Edge Detection No staple detected Staple detected
023 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
024 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP
025 Punch Registration Detection Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
026 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full
027 Punch HP Not HP HP
028 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 See *1
277
Reading
0 1
029 Punch Selection DiPSW 2 See *1
Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed HP

030 Not HP HP
Sensor
031 Leading Edge Detection Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
032 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
033 Arrival Sensor No paper detected Paper detected

4 034 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
035 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
036 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
037 Folder Pass Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
No paper
038 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected*2
detected*2
No paper
039 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2
040 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Front Not HP HP
041 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front No staple detected Staple detected
Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection:

042 No staple detected Staple detected
Front
043 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: Rear Not HP HP
044 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear No staple detected Staple detected
Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection:

045 No staple detected Staple detected
Rear
046 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full
047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front Not used in the machine
048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not used in the machine
049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not used in the machine
278
Input Check
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
4
Reading
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
Shift Exit Sensor

002 No paper detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor

003 Paper detected No paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor)
Staple Moving HP Sensor

004 Not HP HP
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
005 Not HP HP
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

008 Not HP HP
(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
009 Staple Sensor Staple detected No staple detected
010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected No staple detected
279
Reading
0 1
Exit Guide Plate HP

011 Not HP HP
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray

013
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

4 014
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Lower limit Not lower limit
Proof Full Sensor

015 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
280
Output Check
Output Check
Copier
5804 Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230
004 Exit Motor: 180

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
4
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
010 Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90
014 Bank: Feed Motor: 300

Paper feed motor (Optional paper feed
unit)
281
5804 Output Check
021 LCT: Feed Motor: 300
024 LCT: Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)
4 027 LCT: Feed Motor: 90

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)
030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional paper
031 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 4 feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)
033 Pick-up Solenoid 1

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
034 Pick-up Solenoid 2
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3 Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional paper

036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)
038 Tray Lift Motor 1: Up
039 Tray Lift Motor 1: Down

-
040 Tray Lift Motor 2: Up
041 Tray Lift Motor 2: Down
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid Not used
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper feed

043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
unit)
282
Output Check
5804 Output Check
044 Registration Motor: 230

-
048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used
050 Duplex Inverter Motor: Fwd: 230 4

051 Duplex Inverter Motor: Fwd: 180

-
054 Duplex Inverter Motor: Rev: 230
058 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 230

-
062 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 230
066 By-pass Feed Clutch -
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid -
283
5804 Output Check
068 Bridge: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
072 Bridge: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge unit)
073 Bridge: Drive Motor: Reset -
4 074 Bridge: Drive Motor: Enable -
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor -
077 OPC Motor: 230
078 OPC Motor: 180

Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90
081 Transfer/Development Motor: 230

-
085 Fusing Motor: 230

-
089 Development Puddle Motor -
090 PTL Control -
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
284
Output Check
5804 Output Check
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High

Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor -
099 1-Bin Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 2 solenoid (1-bin unit) 4
100 Polygon Motor: 230

-
104 LD 1
-
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp -
108 Charge Bias -
109 Development Bias -
110 Transfer Belt Voltage -
111 ID Sensor LED -
115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor
116 Shift Tray Motor Not used
117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan
202 Scanner Lamp -
285
6144 Display Description
6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor
6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor
6144 3 Exit Motor -
Proof Junction Gate

6144 4 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
SOL
4 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor
6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor
6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor
6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer
Staple Junction Gate

6144 9 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
SOL
Positioning Roller
6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid
Solenoid
6144 11 Stack Feed-out Motor -
6144 12 Shift Motor -
6144 13 Exit Guide Plate Motor -
6145 Display Description
6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor
6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor
6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor
6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
286
Output Check
6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor
Exit Guide Plate

6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Motor
Open/Close Motor
6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor
Oscillating Back Roller

6145 9 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
Motor
6145 10 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor
6145 11 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler Movement Motor 4

6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530
Upper Junction Gate

6145 15 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
Solenoid
Lower Junction Gate

6145 16 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
Solenoid
6145 17 Knock Solenoid Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
Trailing Edge Hold

6145 18 Positioning Roller Solenoid
Solenoid
Saddle Stitch Hold

6145 19 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
Solonoid
Stack Junction Gate

6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Motor
Open/Close Motor
Trailing Edge Fence

6145 21 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
Moving Motor
Saddle Stitch Staple

6145 22 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
Motor: Front
Saddle Stitch Staple

6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
Motor: Rear
6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor
6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor
287
Drive Roller
6145 26 Positioning Roller Motor
Oscillating Motor
6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor
6145 28 Punch Moving Motor Punch Movement Motor
Punch Registration
6145 29 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Detection Motor
Exit Jogger Motor:

6145 30 -
Front
4 6145 31
Exit Jogger Motor:
Rear
-
Exit Jogger Release

6145 32 -
Motor
288
Printer Service Table

Printer SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - - 4
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
289
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a
"Collate Type" configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
4 bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching
is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
290
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed
to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - - 4
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of
printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
291
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch

0: Disable 1: Enable
Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type
bit 0 from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and configured
options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents

0: Disable 1: Enable
4 of a job.
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS
Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK
applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria 0: Pattern3 1: Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 0: Disable 1: Enable
jobs. (100) (1000)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job
Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 5
292
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via 0: Disable 1: Enable

USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
bit 6
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily
mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether to time-out
immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
007 Bit Switch 7 DFU - -

4
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 -
DFU -
to 5
bit 6 [PS]: Orientation Auto Detect Function 0: Enable 1: Disable
Automatically chooses page orientations of PostScript jobs (Landscape or Portrait)

based on the content.
bit 7 [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Function 0: Enable 1: Disable
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait) based on

the content.
1003 Clear setting
Initialize Printer System

001
Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode.
003 Delete Program DFU
Print Summary
1004
Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets.
1005 Display Version.
293
Printer Application Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
Sample/Locked Print
This SP disables/enables use of the document server.

1006 [0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Enabled. Document server can be used.
1: Disabled. Document server cannot be used.
294
Scanner Service Table
Scanner Service Table

SP Tables
SP Number/Name Function/[Setting]
1001 Scan NV Version Displays the version of the scanner NV.
Selects the compression type for binary picture

processing.
1004 Compression Type
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
4
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned
image.
1005 Erase Margin If the machine has scanned the edge of the original,
create a margin.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Enables or disables the TWAIN function.

1009 Remote scan disable [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
Displays or does not display the clear light PDF

function.
1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Display, 1: Not display
Displays or does not display the original counter.

1011 Org Count Disp [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
Clears or does not clear a user information after a

job.
1012 User Info Release
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not clear, 1: Clear
295
SP Number/Name Function/[Setting]
Compression level (grayscale)
2021 These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that can be
selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
Range: 5 (lowest ratio) <-> 95 (highest ratio)
1 Comp 1: 5 - 95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step]
2 Comp 2: 5 - 95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step]
3 Comp 3: 5 - 95 [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step]
4 4 Comp 4: 5 - 95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step]
5 Comp 5: 5 - 95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]

2024* Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at
the operation panel.
1 Compression Ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2 Compression Ratio (High comp image) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
296

Ricoh MP 4000 5000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh MP 4000 5000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh MP 4000 5000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model AL-C1/C1.

Prevention of Physical Injury

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:

• FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

Item Callout Key Machine Code

Platen Cover (See Note 1) [2] C G329

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [6] C D351

2000-sheet LCT [5] C D352

1200-sheet LCT [4] C D353

1-Bin Tray [10] U D389

Bridge Unit [9] U D386

1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 2.) [7] C B408

2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (See

Key Counter Bracket - C A674

HDD (for D009/D012 only) - U D362

Copy Data Security Unit - C B829

HDD Encryption Unit - C D377

Scanner Accessibility Option - C B838

Item Callout Key Machine Code

Fax Option for D091/D092 D509

SAF Memory - C G578

Handset (USA model only) - C B433

Printer/Scanner Unit - U D381

Printer Unit - U D381

RPCS Printer Unit - U D381

Printer Upgrade Unit - U D381

Scanner Upgrade Unit - U D381

PostScript3 Unit - U D381

IEEE 1284 - C B679

IEEE 802.11a/g, g Wireless LAN - C D377

Memory Unit 256 MB - U D362

File Format Converter - C D377

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Different Points from Predecessor Products

Scanner Color only Color and B/W

VM Card Standard Option

1 Exposure Glass 22 By-pass Feed Roller

2 2nd Mirror 23 By-pass Separation Roller

3 1st Mirror 24 Duplex/by-pass transport roller

4 Exposure Lamp 25 Upper Relay Roller

5 Original Width Sensors 26 Feed Roller

6 Original Length Sensors 27 Separation Roller

7 Scanner Motor 28 Pick-up Roller 1

9 SBU 30 Development Unit

10 Junction Gate 2 31 Charge Roller

11 Duplex Inverter Gate 32 Fθ Mirror

12 Duplex Entrance Sensor 33 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)

13 Duplex Inverter Roller 34 Polygonal Mirror Motor

14 Hot Roller 35 Laser Unit

15 Pressure Roller 36 Toner Bottle Holder

16 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Junction Gate 1

17 Duplex Transport Roller 38 Exit Roller